Rotating electric machine

ABSTRACT

A rotating electric machine includes: a field system including a magnet section having a plurality of magnetic poles whose polarities alternate in a circumferential direction; and an armature arranged to face the field system and including a multi-phase armature coil. Either of the field system and the armature is configured as a rotor. The field system also includes a soft-magnetic core having at least one magnet-receiving hole in which the magnet section is received and held. The armature coil has electrical conductor sections arranged at positions facing the field system and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. In the armature, inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction. The inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole are magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet section when the electrical conductor sections are not energized.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

The present application is a continuation application of International Application No. PCT/JP2020/033509 filed on Sep. 3, 2020, which is based on and claims priority from Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-164680 filed on Sep. 10, 2019. The entire contents of these applications are incorporated by reference into the present application.

BACKGROUND 1 Technical Field

The present disclosure relates to rotating electric machines.

2 Description of Related Art

Conventionally, IPM (Interior Permanent Magnet) rotors have been widely used for rotating electric machines. The IPM rotors generally have a rotor core formed by laminating magnetic steel sheets, magnet-receiving holes formed in the rotor core, and magnets inserted respectively in the magnet-receiving holes. Moreover, as the magnets employed in the IPM rotors, there are magnets as disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. JP 2014-093859A. According to this patent document, the magnets are configured to have a surface magnetic flux density distribution approximate to a sine wave. Consequently, the magnetic flux change in the magnets becomes gentler than that in radial magnets. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the eddy current loss. Moreover, it also becomes possible to increase the magnetic flux density.

SUMMARY

However, with increase in the surface magnetic flux density of the rotor, magnetic saturation tends to occur on the stator side. This tendency becomes remarkable particularly when permanent magnets having high residual flux density Br are employed in the rotor. Further, upon occurrence of magnetic saturation on the stator side, magnetic flux leakage tends to occur from the designed magnetic circuit. Consequently, it may become impossible for the magnetic flux from the rotor to be effectively used, causing the torque to be limited. That is, even with increase in the surface magnetic flux density of the rotor, it may become impossible to improve the torque as intended.

The present disclosure has been accomplished in view of the above problem. It is, therefore, a primary object of the present disclosure to provide a rotating electric machine capable of suppressing magnetic flux leakage from the designed magnetic circuit and thereby eliminating the torque limitation.

According to a first solution to the above problem, there is provided a rotating electric machine which includes: a field system including a magnet section having a plurality of magnetic poles whose polarities alternate in a circumferential direction; and an armature arranged to face the field system and including a multi-phase armature coil. Either of the field system and the armature is configured as a rotor. The field system also includes a soft-magnetic core having at least one magnet-receiving hole in which the magnet section is received and held. The armature coil has electrical conductor sections arranged at positions facing the field system and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. In the armature, inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction. The inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole are magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet section when the electrical conductor sections are not energized.

With the above configuration, the inter-conductor members, which are provided between the electrical conductor sections, are magnetically saturated by the magnetic flux from the magnet section when the electrical conductor sections are not energized. Consequently, the inter-conductor members become unable to perform a function of guiding magnetic flux in a magnetic circuit. As a result, it becomes possible to have the magnetic flux flow along the designed magnetic circuit and to eliminate torque limitation due to magnetic saturation.

According to a second solution, in the above first solution, the inter-conductor members and the magnet section are configured to satisfy the following relationship: Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wt is a total circumferential width of the inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole, Bs is a saturation flux density of the inter-conductor members, Wm is a circumferential width of the magnet section per magnetic pole and Br is a residual flux density of the magnet section.

Consequently, it becomes possible to reliably have the magnetic flux flow along the designed magnetic circuit and to reliably eliminate torque limitation due to magnetic saturation. Moreover, it also becomes possible to easily design the inter-conductor members.

According to a third solution, in the above second solution, each magnetic pole of the magnet section has a plurality of magnetic flux acting surfaces each of which is a peripheral surface of the magnet section on the armature side in a radial direction and constitutes a magnetic flux inflow surface or a magnetic flux outflow surface. The circumferential width Wm of the magnet section per magnetic pole is represented by the sum of circumferential widths of the magnetic flux acting surfaces.

Consequently, it becomes possible to reliably have the magnetic flux flow along the designed magnetic circuit and to reliably eliminate torque limitation due to magnetic saturation. Moreover, it also becomes possible to easily design the inter-conductor members.

According to a fourth solution, in the above third solution, the circumferential width Wm of the magnet section per magnetic pole is represented by the sum of circumferential widths of only parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the soft-magnetic core.

In the case where flux barriers such as void spaces are provided in the at least one magnet-receiving hole, it is difficult for those parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the flux barriers to transmit the magnetic flux to the soft-magnetic core. On the other hand, it is easier for the magnetic flux to flow into the magnet section from the armature coil side or flow out of the magnet section to the armature coil side through those parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the soft-magnetic core than through those parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the flux barriers. Accordingly, only those parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the soft-magnetic core constitute substantial magnetic flux acting surfaces. Therefore, in this case, the circumferential width Wm of the magnet section per magnetic pole is represented by the sum of circumferential widths of only those parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the soft-magnetic core. Consequently, it becomes possible to more accurately design the inter-conductor members.

According to a fifth solution, in any of the above first to fourth solutions, part of the magnetic flux from the magnet section is short-circuited via magnetic paths formed in the soft-magnetic core. The inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured, taking into account the magnetic flux short-circuited via the magnetic paths formed in the soft-magnetic core, to have the inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole magnetically saturated by the magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet section when the electrical conductor sections are not energized. In the case of the magnet section being received in the at least one magnet-receiving hole of the soft-magnetic core, part of the magnetic flux from the magnet section is short-circuited via magnetic paths formed in the soft-magnetic core. That is, magnetic flux leakage occurs, causing the amount of the magnetic flux flowing from the soft-magnetic core to the inter-conductor members to be reduced. Therefore, in this case, the inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured, taking into account the magnetic flux short-circuited via the magnetic paths formed in the soft-magnetic core, to have the inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole magnetically saturated by the magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet section when the electrical conductor sections are not energized.

Consequently, even with occurrence of magnetic flux leakage in the soft-magnetic core, the inter-conductor members can still be magnetically saturated. As a result, it becomes possible to reliably have the magnetic flux flow along the designed magnetic circuit and to reliably eliminate torque limitation due to magnetic saturation.

According to a sixth solution, in any of the above first to fifth solutions, the inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured to satisfy the following relationship: Wc×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wc is a total width of magnetic paths formed in each part of the soft-magnetic core corresponding to one magnetic pole, Bc is a saturation flux density of the soft-magnetic core, Wt is a total circumferential width of the inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole, Bs is a saturation flux density of the inter-conductor members, Wm is a circumferential width of the magnet section per magnetic pole and Br is a residual flux density of the magnet section.

Consequently, even with occurrence of magnetic flux leakage in the soft-magnetic core, the inter-conductor members can still be magnetically saturated. As a result, it becomes possible to reliably have the magnetic flux flow along the designed magnetic circuit and to reliably eliminate torque limitation due to magnetic saturation. Moreover, it also becomes possible to easily design the inter-conductor members.

According to a seventh solution, in the above sixth solution, in each part of the soft-magnetic core corresponding to one magnetic pole, each of the magnetic paths is formed to extend from a magnetic flux outflow surface to a magnetic flux inflow surface of the magnetic pole of the magnet section. The magnetic paths include a first magnetic path formed by detouring around a first circumferential end portion of the magnetic pole of the magnet section and a second magnetic path formed by detouring around a second circumferential end portion of the magnetic pole of the magnet section. The inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured to satisfy the following relationship: (Wc1+Wc2)×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wc1 is a width of the first magnetic path and Wc2 is a width of the second magnetic path.

In the case of the magnet section being received in the at least one magnet-receiving hole of the soft-magnetic core, the magnetic flux may be short-circuited via the first and second magnetic paths formed to respectively detour around the first and second circumferential end portions of each magnetic pole of the magnet section. Therefore, in this case, the inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured to satisfy the relationship of (Wc1+Wc2)×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wc1 is a width of the first magnetic path and Wc2 is a width of the second magnetic path. Consequently, even with occurrence of magnetic flux leakage in the soft-magnetic core, the inter-conductor members can still be magnetically saturated. As a result, it becomes possible to reliably have the magnetic flux flow along the designed magnetic circuit and to reliably eliminate torque limitation due to magnetic saturation. Moreover, it also becomes possible to easily design the inter-conductor members.

According to an eighth solution, in the above seventh solution, each magnetic pole of the magnet section is constituted of a pair of magnets arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction. The magnetic paths formed in each part of the soft-magnetic core corresponding to one magnetic pole further include a third magnetic path formed between the pair of magnets constituting the magnetic pole. The inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured to satisfy the following relationship: (Wc1+Wc2+Wc3)×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wc3 is a width of the third magnetic path.

In the case of each magnetic pole of the magnet section being constituted of a pair of magnets arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction, part of the magnetic flux may be short-circuited via the third magnetic path formed between the pair of magnets. Therefore, in this case, the inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured to satisfy the relationship of (Wc1+Wc2+Wc3)×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wc3 is a width of the third magnetic path. Consequently, it becomes possible to reliably have the magnetic flux flow along the designed magnetic circuit and to reliably eliminate torque limitation due to magnetic saturation. Moreover, it also becomes possible to easily design the inter-conductor members.

According to a ninth solution, in any of the above first to eighth solutions, each phase of the armature coil is constituted of a plurality of electrical conductors that are connected in parallel to each other. In each of the electrical conductor sections, the electrical conductors are arranged in radial alignment with each other.

It is known that magnetic flux leakage occurs from the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction. Due to the magnetic flux leakage, eddy current loss may occur in the electrical conductor sections. Therefore, in each of the electrical conductor sections, the electrical conductors are arranged in radial alignment with each other. Consequently, it becomes possible to suppress generation of eddy current in the electrical conductor sections, thereby suppressing the eddy current loss.

According to a tenth solution, in any of the above first to ninth solutions, each phase of the armature coil is constituted of a plurality of electrical conductors that are connected in parallel to each other. In each of the electrical conductor sections, the electrical conductors are arranged in alignment with one another in at least one of a radial direction and the circumferential direction. In each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor sections of the same phase, the relative positional relationship between the electrical conductors is maintained but the arrangement positions of a same one of the electrical conductors in the pair of the electrical conductor sections are different from each other when viewed along an axial direction of the rotor.

With the above configuration, in each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor sections of the same phase, the relative positional relationship between the electrical conductors is maintained but the arrangement positions of a same one of the electrical conductors in the pair of the electrical conductor sections are different from each other when viewed along the axial direction of the rotor. Consequently, it becomes possible to reduce the differences between electromotive forces induced respectively in the electrical conductors of the same phase, thereby reducing circulating current flowing in the armature coil.

According to an eleventh solution, in the above tenth solution, for each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor sections of the same phase, the arrangement positions of the electrical conductors constituting one of the pair of the electrical conductor sections are set to arrangement positions which are obtained by rotating the arrangement positions of the electrical conductors constituting the other of the pair of the electrical conductor sections by 90×N degrees (N is an integer) when viewed along the axial direction.

Consequently, it becomes possible to reduce, for each phase of the armature coil, the differences between the electromotive forces induced respectively in the electrical conductors of the phase; the differences between the electromotive forces are caused by the differences between the circumferential positions of the electrical conductors relative to the magnetic poles of the magnet section.

According to a twelfth solution, in any of the above ninth to eleventh solutions, each of the electrical conductors is constituted of a wire bundle in which a plurality of wires are bundled together; and electrical resistances between the wires are higher than an electrical resistance of each of the wires.

With the above configuration, it becomes possible to reduce the eddy current loss by making the electrical resistivity between the wires and the electrical resistivity of each of the wires different from each other.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The above-described object, other objects, features and beneficial advantages according to the present disclosure will become more apparent from the following detailed explanation with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the drawings:

FIG. 1 is a perspective longitudinal cross-sectional view of a rotating electric machine;

FIG. 2 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the rotating electric machine;

FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 2;

FIG. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of part of FIG. 3;

FIG. 5 is an exploded view of the rotating electric machine;

FIG. 6 is an exploded view of an inverter unit;

FIG. 7 is a torque diagram illustrating the relationship between the ampere-turns of a stator coil and torque density;

FIG. 8 is a transverse cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of a rotor and a stator;

FIG. 9 is an enlarged view of part of FIG. 8;

FIG. 10 is a transverse cross-sectional view of the stator;

FIG. 11 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the stator;

FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the stator coil;

FIG. 13 is a perspective view illustrating the configuration of an electrical conductor;

FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a wire;

FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) are diagrams illustrating the layout of electrical conductors at the nth layer;

FIG. 16 is a side view illustrating electrical conductors at the nth layer and the (n+1)th layer;

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between electrical angle and magnetic flux density in magnets of an embodiment;

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between electrical angle and magnetic flux density in magnets of comparative examples;

FIG. 19 is an electric circuit diagram of a control system of the rotating electric machine;

FIG. 20 is a functional block diagram illustrating a current feedback control process performed by a controller;

FIG. 21 is a functional block diagram illustrating a torque feedback control process performed by the controller;

FIG. 22 is a transverse cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of a rotor and a stator in a second embodiment;

FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of part of FIG. 22;

FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b) are diagrams illustrating flows of magnetic flux in magnet units;

FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view of a stator in a first modification;

FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view of another stator in the first modification;

FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of a stator in a second modification;

FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view of a stator in a third modification;

FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of a stator in a fourth modification;

FIG. 30 is a transverse cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of a rotor and a stator in a seventh modification;

FIG. 31 is a functional block diagram illustrating part of a process performed by an operation signal generator in an eighth modification;

FIG. 32 is a flow chart illustrating a process of varying a carrier frequency;

FIGS. 33(a)-33(c) are diagrams illustrating the manners of connecting electrical conductors forming an electrical conductor group in a ninth modification;

FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of radially stacking four pairs of electrical conductors in the ninth modification;

FIG. 35 is a transverse cross-sectional view of both a rotor and a stator of an inner rotor type rotating electric machine in a tenth modification;

FIG. 36 is an enlarged view of part of FIG. 35;

FIG. 37 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the inner rotor type rotating electric machine in the tenth modification;

FIG. 38 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view illustrating the overall configuration of another inner rotor type rotating electric machine in the tenth modification;

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of an inner rotor type rotating electric machine in an eleventh modification;

FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the inner rotor type rotating electric machine in the eleventh modification;

FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a rotating-armature type rotating electric machine in a twelfth modification;

FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of electrical conductors in a fourteenth modification;

FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating the relationships between reluctance torque, magnet torque and radial distance DM;

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing teeth;

FIG. 45 is a perspective view of a vehicle wheel, which has an in-wheel motor structure, and its peripheral structures;

FIG. 46 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the vehicle wheel and its peripheral structures;

FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the vehicle wheel;

FIG. 48 is a side view, from the protruding side of a rotating shaft, of a rotating electric machine which is provided as an in-wheel motor;

FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 49-49 in FIG. 48;

FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 50-50 in FIG. 49;

FIG. 51 is an exploded cross-sectional view of the rotating electric machine;

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of part of a rotor of the rotating electric machine;

FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of a stator of the rotating electric machine;

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are each a developed view of a stator coil of the stator on a plane;

FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating skew angles of electrical conductors forming the stator coil;

FIG. 56 is an exploded cross-sectional view of an inverter unit of the rotating electric machine;

FIG. 57 is another exploded cross-sectional view of the inverter unit;

FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view illustrating the arrangement of electrical modules in an inverter housing of the inverter unit;

FIG. 59 is a circuit diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of an inverter formed in the inverter unit;

FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a configuration example of switch modules of the inverter unit;

FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views illustrating a first exemplary water-cooling structure of the switch modules of the inverter unit; FIGS. 62(a)-62(c) are cross-sectional views illustrating a second exemplary water-cooling structure of the switch modules of the inverter unit;

FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b) are cross-sectional views illustrating a third exemplary water-cooling structure of the switch modules of the inverter unit;

FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view illustrating an exemplary water-cooling structure of electrical modules of the inverter unit;

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary arrangement of the electrical modules with respect to a cooling water passage in the inverter unit;

FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 66-66 in FIG. 49;

FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 67-67 in FIG. 49;

FIG. 68 is a perspective view of a busbar module of the inverter unit;

FIG. 69 is a developed view of the electrical modules on a plane illustrating electrical connection between the electrical modules and the busbar module;

FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating the electrical connection between the electrical modules, which are arranged in an annular shape, and the busbar module;

FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the electrical connection between the electrical modules and the busbar module;

FIGS. 72(a)-72(d) are cross-sectional views illustrating a first modification of the in-wheel motor;

FIGS. 73(a)-73(c) are cross-sectional views illustrating a second modification of the in-wheel motor;

FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b) are cross-sectional views illustrating a third modification of the in-wheel motor;

FIG. 75 is a perspective view of a stator coil in a fourth modification of the in-wheel motor;

FIG. 76 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a rotating electric machine in a third embodiment;

FIG. 77 is a transverse cross-sectional view of a stator and a rotor in the third embodiment;

FIG. 78 is an enlarged view of part of FIG. 77;

FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view of straight portions of electrical conductors forming a same phase winding of a stator coil in the third embodiment;

FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the electrical conductors;

FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating the outline of the straight portions and turn portions of the electrical conductors;

FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating electrical connection between the electrical conductors forming the same phase winding of the stator coil;

FIG. 83 is a transverse cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of a rotor in a modification of the third embodiment;

FIG. 84 is a transverse cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of a rotor in another modification of the third embodiment;

FIG. 85 is a transverse cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of a rotor in another modification of the third embodiment;

FIG. 86 is a transverse cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of a rotor in another modification of the third embodiment;

FIG. 87 is a transverse cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of a rotor in another modification of the third embodiment;

FIG. 88 is a transverse cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of a rotor in another modification of the third embodiment; and

FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view of straight portions of electrical conductors in another modification of the third embodiment.

DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS

Embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. In the embodiments, parts functionally and/or structurally corresponding to each other and/or parts associated with each other will be designated by the same reference signs or by reference signs which are different in the hundreds place from each other. The corresponding parts and/or the associated parts may refer to the explanation of the other embodiments.

Rotating electric machines in the embodiments are configured to be used, for example, as vehicular power sources. However, the rotating electric machines may also be widely used for other applications, such as industrial, automotive, household, office automation and amusement applications. In addition, in the following embodiments, identical or equivalent parts will be designated by the same reference signs in the drawings, and explanation thereof will not be repeated.

First Embodiment

The rotating electric machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a synchronous multi-phase AC motor with an outer rotor structure (i.e., an outer rotating structure). The outline of the rotating electric machine 10 is illustrated in FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. 1 is a perspective longitudinal cross-sectional view of the rotating electric machine 10. FIG. 2 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view along a rotating shaft 11 of the rotating electric machine 10. FIG. 3 is a transverse cross-sectional view (i.e., cross-sectional view taken along the line in FIG. 2) of the rotating electric machine 10 perpendicular to the rotating shaft 11. FIG. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of part of FIG. 3. FIG. 5 is an exploded view of the rotating electric machine 10. In addition, it should be noted that in FIG. 3, for the sake of simplicity, hatching lines designating cross sections of components of the rotating electric machine 10 except for the rotating shaft 11 are omitted. In the following explanation, the direction in which the rotating shaft 11 extends will be referred to as the axial direction; the directions extending radially from the center of the rotating shaft 11 will be referred to as radial directions; and the direction extending along a circle centering on the rotating shaft 11 will be referred to as the circumferential direction.

The rotating electric machine 10 includes a bearing unit 20, a housing 30, a rotor 40, a stator 50 and an inverter unit 60. These members are each arranged coaxially with the rotating shaft 11 and assembled in a given sequence in the axial direction to together constitute the rotating electric machine 10. The rotating electric machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to have the rotor 40 functioning as a “field system” and the stator 50 functioning as an “armature”. That is, the rotating electric machine 10 is embodied as a rotating-field type rotating electric machine.

The bearing unit 20 includes two bearings 21 and 22 arranged apart from each other in the axial direction and a holding member 23 that holds both the bearings 21 and 22. The bearings 21 and 22 are implemented by, for example, radial ball bearings each of which includes an outer ring 25, an inner ring 26 and a plurality of balls 27 disposed between the outer ring 25 and the inner ring 26. The holding member 23 is cylindrical-shaped and has both the bearings 21 and 22 assembled thereto on the radially inner side thereof. Moreover, on the radially inner side of the bearings 21 and 22, there are rotatably supported the rotating shaft 11 and the rotor 40. That is, the bearings 21 and 22 constitute a pair of bearings rotatably supporting the rotating shaft 11.

In each of the bearings 21 and 22, the balls 27 are retained by a not-shown retainer, thereby keeping the pitch between each pair of the balls 27. Moreover, each of the bearings 21 and 22 has sealing members on the upper and lower sides of the retainer in the axial direction, and has non-electrically conductive grease (e.g., non-electrically conductive urea-based grease) filled inside the sealing members. In addition, the position of the inner ring 26 is mechanically held by a spacer, and constant-pressure preloading is performed from the inner side to make it convex in the vertical direction.

The housing 30 has a circumferential wall 31 that is cylindrical in shape. The circumferential wall 31 has a first end and a second end that are opposite to each other in the axial direction. Moreover, the circumferential wall 31 has an end surface 32 at the first end and an opening 33 at the second end. The opening 33 is formed to open over the entire second end of the circumferential wall 31. The end surface 32 has a circular hole 34 formed at the center thereof. The bearing unit 20 is inserted in the hole 34 and fixed by fixtures such as screws or rivets. Inside the housing 30, i.e., in an internal space defined by the circumferential wall 31 and the end surface 32, there are received the rotor 40 and the stator 50 both of which are hollow cylindrical in shape. In the present embodiment, the rotating electric machine 10 is of an outer rotor type such that the stator 50 is arranged radially inside the cylindrical rotor 40 in the housing 30. Moreover, the rotor 40 is supported in a cantilever fashion by the rotating shaft 11 on the end surface 32 side in the axial direction.

The rotor 40 includes a hollow cylindrical magnet holder 41 and an annular magnet unit 42 provided radially inside the magnet holder 41. The magnet holder 41 is substantially cup-shaped and functions as a magnet holding member. The magnet holder 41 has a cylindrical portion 43, an attaching portion (or attachment) 44 that is also cylindrical in shape and smaller in diameter than the cylindrical portion 43, and an intermediate portion 45 connecting the cylindrical portion 43 and the attaching portion 44. On an inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43, there is mounted the magnet unit 42.

The magnet holder 41 is formed of a material having sufficient mechanical strength, such as a cold-rolled steel sheet (e.g., SPCC), forged steel or Carbon Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (CFRP).

In a through-hole 44 a of the attaching portion 44, there is inserted the rotating shaft 11. The attaching portion 44 is fixed to a portion of the rotating shaft 11 which is located inside the through-hole 44 a. That is, the magnet holder 41 is fixed to the rotating shaft 11 via the attaching portion 44. In addition, the attaching portion 44 may be fixed to the rotating shaft 11 by spline coupling using protrusions and recesses, key coupling, welding or crimping. Consequently, the rotor 40 rotates together with the rotating shaft 11.

To a radially outer periphery of the attaching portion 44, there are assembled both the bearings 21 and 22 of the bearing unit 20. As described above, the bearing unit 20 is fixed to the end surface 32 of the housing 30; therefore, the rotating shaft 11 and the rotor 40 are rotatably supported by the housing 30. Consequently, the rotor 40 is rotatable in the housing 30.

The attaching portion 44 is provided at only one of two opposite axial ends of the rotor 40. Therefore, the rotor 40 is supported by the rotating shaft 11 in a cantilever fashion. Moreover, the attaching portion 44 of the rotor 40 is rotatably supported by the bearings 21 and 22 of the bearing unit 20 at two different axial positions. That is, the rotor 40 is rotatably supported, at one of two opposite axial ends of the magnet holder 41, by the two bearings 21 and 22 that are located apart from each other in the axial direction. Therefore, though the rotor 40 is supported by the rotating shaft 11 in the cantilever fashion, it is still possible to realize stable rotation of the rotor 40. In addition, the rotor 40 is supported by the bearings 21 and 22 at positions offset from an axially center position of the rotor 40 to one side.

In the bearing unit 20, the bearing 22 which is located closer to the center of the rotor 40 (i.e., on the lower side in the figures) and the bearing 21 which is located further from the center of the rotor 40 (i.e., on the upper side in the figures) are different in gap dimensions between the outer and inner rings 25 and 26 and the balls 27. For example, the gap dimensions in the bearing 22 which is located closer to the center of the rotor 40 are greater than the gap dimensions in the bearing 21 which is located further from the center of the rotor 40. In this case, on the closer side to the center of the rotor 40, even if deflection of the rotor 40 and/or vibration caused by imbalance due to parts tolerances act on the bearing unit 20, it is still possible to well absorb the deflection and/or the vibration. Specifically, in the bearing 22 which is located closer to the center of the rotor 40 (i.e., on the lower side in the figures), the play dimensions (or gap dimensions) are increased by preloading, thereby absorbing vibration caused by the cantilever structure. The preloading may be either fixed-position preloading or constant-pressure preloading. In the case of performing fixed-position preloading, both the outer rings 25 of the bearings 21 and 22 are joined to the holding member 23 by, for example, press-fitting or bonding. On the other hand, both the inner rings 26 of the bearings 21 and 22 are joined to the rotating shaft 11 by, for example, press-fitting or bonding. In this case, a preload can be produced by locating the outer ring 25 of the bearing 21 at a different axial position from the inner ring 26 of the bearing 21. Similarly, a preload can be produced by locating the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22 at a different axial position from the inner ring 26 of the bearing 22.

In the case of performing constant-pressure preloading, a preloading spring, such as a wave washer 24, is arranged in a region between the bearings 21 and 22 to produce a preload in the axial direction from the region toward the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22. In this case, both the inner rings 26 of the bearings 21 and 22 are joined to the rotating shaft 11 by, for example, press-fitting or bonding. The outer ring 25 of the bearing 21 or the bearing 22 is arranged with a predetermined clearance to the holding member 23. With the above configuration, a spring force is applied by the preloading spring to the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22 in a direction away from the bearing 21. Moreover, this force is transmitted via the rotating shaft 11 to the inner ring 26 of the bearing 21, pressing the inner ring 26 of the bearing 21 in the axial direction toward the bearing 22. Consequently, in each of the bearings 21 and 22, the axial positions of the outer and inner rings 25 and 26 are offset from each other, producing a preload as in the case of performing fixed-position preloading as described above.

In addition, in the case of performing constant-pressure preloading, the spring force is not necessarily applied to the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22 as shown in FIG. 2. For example, the spring force may be applied to the outer ring 25 of the bearing 21 instead. Moreover, preload can alternatively be produced in both the bearings 21 and 22 by: locating the inner ring 26 of either of the bearings 21 and 22 with a predetermined clearance to the rotating shaft 11; and joining both the outer rings 25 of the bearings 21 and 22 to the holding member 23 by, for example, press-fitting or bonding.

Furthermore, in the case of applying a force to the inner ring 26 of the bearing 21 in a direction away from the bearing 22, the force may be applied to the inner ring 26 of the bearing 22 as well in a direction away from the bearing 21. In contrast, in the case of applying a force to the inner ring 26 of the bearing 21 in a direction toward the bearing 22, the force may be applied to the inner ring 26 of the bearing 22 as well in a direction toward the bearing 21.

In addition, in the case of applying the rotating electric machine 10 to a vehicle as a vehicular power source, vibration having a component in the preload producing direction may be applied to the preload producing mechanism and/or the direction of gravity acting on the preload application target may be changed. Therefore, in the case of applying the rotating electric machine 10 to a vehicle, it is preferable to perform fixed-position preloading.

The intermediate portion 45 has both an annular inner shoulder part 49 a and an annular outer shoulder part 49 b. The outer shoulder part 49 b is located outside the inner shoulder part 49 a in the radial direction of the intermediate portion 45. Moreover, the inner shoulder part 49 a and the outer shoulder part 49 b are located apart from each other in the axial direction of the intermediate portion 45. Consequently, the cylindrical portion 43 and the attaching portion 44 partially overlap each other in the radial direction of the intermediate portion 45. That is, the cylindrical portion 43 protrudes axially outward from a proximal end (i.e., an inner end on the lower side in the figures) of the attaching portion 44. With this configuration, it is possible to support the rotor 40 with respect to the rotating shaft 11 at a closer position to the center of gravity of the rotor 40 than in the case of configuring the intermediate portion 45 to be in the shape of a flat plate without any step. Consequently, it is possible to realize stable operation of the rotor 40.

Moreover, with the above configuration of the intermediate portion 45, there are formed both an annular bearing-receiving recess 46 and an annular coil-receiving recess 47 in the rotor 40. The bearing-receiving recess 46 is radially located on the inner side of the intermediate portion 45 to surround the attaching portion 44. The bearing-receiving recess 46 receives part of the bearing unit 20 therein. The coil-receiving recess 47 is radially located on the outer side of the intermediate portion 45 to surround the bearing-receiving recess 46. The coil-receiving recess 47 receives therein a coil end 54 of a stator coil 51 of the stator 50 which will be described later. Moreover, the bearing-receiving recess 46 and the coil-receiving recess 47 are located to be radially adjacent to each other. In other words, the bearing-receiving recess 46 and the coil-receiving recess 47 are located to have part of the bearing unit 20 and the coil end 54 of the stator coil 51 radially overlapping each other. Consequently, it becomes possible to reduce the axial length of the rotating electric machine 10.

The intermediate portion 45 is formed to project radially outward from the rotating shaft 11 side. Moreover, in the intermediate portion 45, there is formed a contact prevention portion that extends in the axial direction to prevent contact with the coil end 54 of the stator coil 51 of the stator 50. In addition, the intermediate portion 45 corresponds to a projecting portion.

The coil end 54 may be bent radially inward or radially outward, thereby reducing the axial dimension of the coil end 54 and thus the axial length of the stator 50. The direction of bending the coil end 54 may be determined in consideration of the assembling of the stator 50 to the rotor 40. Specifically, considering the fact that the stator 50 is assembled to the radially inner periphery of the rotor 40, the coil end 54 may be bent radially inward on the insertion end side to the rotor 40. Moreover, a coil end on the opposite side to the coil end 54 may be bent in an arbitrary direction; however, in terms of manufacturing, it is preferable to bend the coil end to the radially outer side where there is a space allowance.

The magnet unit 42, which serves as a magnet section, is constituted of a plurality of permanent magnets that are arranged on the radially inner side of the cylindrical portion 43 so as to have their polarities alternately changing in the circumferential direction. Consequently, the magnet unit 42 has a plurality of magnetic poles arranged in the circumferential direction. In addition, the details of the magnet unit 42 will be described later.

The stator 50 is provided radially inside the rotor 40. The stator 50 includes the stator coil 51, which is wound into a substantially cylindrical (or annular) shape, and a stator core 52 that is arranged, as a base member, radially inside the stator coil 51. The stator coil 51 is arranged to face the annular magnet unit 42 through a predetermined air gap formed therebetween. The stator coil 51 is comprised of a plurality of phase windings. Each of the phase windings is formed by connecting a plurality of electrical conductors, which are arranged in the circumferential direction, to one another at a predetermined pitch. In the present embodiment, the stator coil 51 includes both a three-phase coil comprised of U-phase, V-phase and W-phase windings and a three-phase coil comprised of X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase windings. That is, the stator coil 51 is comprised of six phase windings. The stator core 52 is formed by laminating magnetic steel sheets that are made of a soft-magnetic material into an annular shape. The stator core 52 is assembled to a radially inner periphery of the stator coil 51. The magnetic steel sheets are formed, for example, of silicon steel that is obtained by adding silicon by a few percent (e.g., 3%) to iron. In addition, the stator coil 51 corresponds to an armature coil and the stator core 52 corresponds to an armature core.

The stator coil 51 has a coil side part 53, which is located radially outside the stator core 52 so as to radially overlap the stator core 52, and the coil ends 54 and 55 protruding respectively from opposite axial ends of the stator core 52. The coil side part 53 radially faces both the stator core 52 and the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40. In the state of the stator 50 having been arranged inside the rotor 40, of the coil ends 54 and 55 respectively on the opposite axial sides, the coil end 54 on the bearing unit 20 side (i.e., the upper side in the figures) is received in the coil-receiving recess 47 formed in the magnet holder 41 of the rotor 40. In addition, the details of the stator 50 will be described later.

The inverter unit 60 includes a unit base 61, which is fixed to the housing 30 by fasteners such as bolts, and a plurality of electrical components 62 assembled to the unit base 61. The unit base 61 is formed, for example, of Carbon Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (CFRP). The unit base 61 includes an end plate 63 fixed to the edge of the opening 33 of the housing 30, and a casing 64 formed integrally with the end plate 63 and extending in the axial direction. The end plate 63 has a circular opening 65 formed in a central part thereof. The casing 64 is formed to extend upward from the peripheral edge of the opening 65.

On an outer circumferential surface of the casing 64, there is assembled the stator 50. That is, the outer diameter of the casing 64 is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the stator core 52. The stator 50 and the unit base 61 are integrated into one piece by assembling the stator core 52 to the outer periphery of the casing 64. Moreover, since the unit base 61 is fixed to the housing 30, with the stator core 52 assembled to the casing 64, the stator 50 is also integrated with the housing 30 into one piece.

In addition, the stator core 52 may be assembled to the unit base 61 by, for example, bonding, shrink fitting or press-fitting. Consequently, circumferential or axial displacement of the stator core 52 relative to the unit base 61 is suppressed.

On the radially inner side of the casing 64, there is formed a receiving space for receiving the electrical components 62. In the receiving space, the electrical components 62 are arranged around the rotating shaft 11. That is, the casing 64 serves as a receiving-space forming portion. The electrical components 62 include semiconductor modules 66 for forming an inverter circuit, a control substrate 67 and a capacitor module 68.

In addition, the unit base 61 corresponds to a stator holder (or armature holder) that is provided radially inside the stator 50 and holds the stator 50. The housing 30 and the unit base 61 together constitute a motor housing of the rotating electric machine 10. In the motor housing, the holding member 23 is fixed to the housing 30 on one axial side of the rotor 40; the housing 30 and the unit base 61 are joined to each other on the other axial side of the rotor 40. For example, in an electrically-driven vehicle such as an electric vehicle, the rotating electric machine 10 is installed to the vehicle by mounting the motor housing to the vehicle side. Hereinafter, the configuration of the inverter unit 60 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6, which is an exploded view of the inverter unit 60, in addition to FIGS. 1-5.

In the unit base 61, the casing 64 has a cylindrical portion 71 and an end surface 72 that is formed at one of the two opposite axial ends (i.e., the bearing unit 20-side end) of the cylindrical portion 71. At the axial end of the cylindrical portion 71 on the opposite side to the end surface 72, the cylindrical portion 71 fully opens via the opening 65 of the end plate 63. In a central part of the end surface 72, there is formed a circular hole 73 through which the rotating shaft 11 can be inserted. In the hole 73, there is provided a sealing member 171 to seal the gap between the outer circumferential surface of the rotating shaft 11 and the hole 73. The sealing member 171 may be implemented by, for example, a sliding seal formed of a resin material.

The cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64 serves as a partition portion to partition between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 arranged on the radially outer side thereof and the electrical components 62 arranged on the radially inner side thereof. That is, the rotor 40, the stator 50 and the electrical components 62 are arranged in radial alignment with each other with the cylindrical portion 71 interposed between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 and the electrical components 62.

The electrical components 62 are electrical parts which form the inverter circuit. The electrical components 62 together perform a power running function and an electric power generation function. The power running function is a function of supplying electric current to each phase winding of the stator coil 51 in a predetermined sequence and thereby rotating the rotor 40. The electric power generation function is a function of receiving three-phase alternating current, which flows in the stator coil 51 with rotation of the rotating shaft 11, and outputting it as the generated electric power to the outside. In addition, the electrical components 62 may together perform only either one of the power running function and the electric power generation function. In the case of the rotating electric machine 10 being used as, for example, a vehicular power source, the electric power generation function may be a regenerative function, i.e., a function of externally outputting regenerative electric power.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the electrical components 62 include the hollow cylindrical capacitor module 68 arranged around the rotating shaft 11 and the semiconductor modules 66 arranged in circumferential alignment with each other on an outer circumferential surface of the capacitor module 68. The capacitor module 68 includes a plurality of smoothing capacitors 68 a that are connected in parallel with each other. Specifically, each of the capacitors 68 a is implemented by a laminated film capacitor that is formed by laminating a plurality of film capacitors. Each of the capacitors 68 a has a trapezoidal cross section. The capacitor module 68 is constituted of twelve capacitors 68 a that are arranged in an annular shape.

In addition, in manufacturing the capacitors 68 a, a plurality of films are laminated to form a long film which has a predetermined width. Then, the long film is cut into a plurality of trapezoidal capacitor elements such that: the width direction of the long film coincides with the height direction of the trapezoidal capacitor elements; the upper bases and the lower bases of the trapezoidal capacitor elements are alternately arranged in the longitudinal direction of the long film; and all the legs of the trapezoidal capacitor elements have the same length. Thereafter, to each of the capacitor elements, electrodes are attached to form one of the capacitors 68 a.

Each of the semiconductor modules 66 includes a semiconductor switching element, such as a MOSFET or an IGBT, and is substantially plate-shaped. In the present embodiment, the rotating electric machine 10 includes two three-phase coils, for each of which one inverter circuit is provided. Accordingly, a total of twelve semiconductor modules 66 are arranged in an annular shape to form a semiconductor module group 66A which is included in the electrical components 62.

The semiconductor modules 66 are sandwiched between the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64 and the capacitor module 68. An outer circumferential surface of the semiconductor module group 66A abuts an inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 71 while an inner circumferential surface of the semiconductor module group 66A abuts an outer circumferential surface of the capacitor module 68. With this arrangement, heat generated in the semiconductor modules 66 is transmitted to the end plate 63 via the casing 64, thereby being dissipated from the end plate 63.

The semiconductor module group 66A may have a spacer 69 arranged on the outer circumferential surface thereof, i.e., arranged radially between the semiconductor modules 66 and the cylindrical portion 71. In this case, the shape of a transverse cross section of the capacitor module 68 perpendicular to the axial direction is regular dodecagonal while the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 71 is circular in cross-sectional shape. Accordingly, the spacer 69 may have an inner circumferential surface constituted of flat surfaces and an outer circumferential surface constituted of a curved surface. Moreover, the spacer 69 may be formed as one piece so as to continuously extend in an annular shape on the radially outer side of the semiconductor module group 66A. The spacer 69 may be formed of a material having high heat conductivity, for example a metal such as aluminum, or a heat dissipation gel sheet. In addition, the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 71 may be modified to have the same regular dodecagonal cross-sectional shape as the capacitor module 68. In this case, each of the inner and outer circumferential surfaces of the spacer 69 would be constituted of flat surfaces.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, in the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64, there is formed a cooling water passage 74 through which cooling water flows. Consequently, heat generated in the semiconductor modules 66 can be dissipated to the cooling water flowing through the cooling water passage 74. That is, the casing 64 includes a water-cooling mechanism. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the cooling water passage 74 is annular-shaped to surround the electrical components 62 (i.e., the semiconductor modules 66 and the capacitor module 68). More specifically, the semiconductor modules 66 are arranged along the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 71; the cooling water passage 74 is formed radially outside the semiconductor modules 66 so as to radially overlap them.

The cylindrical portion 71 has the stator 50 arranged on the radially outer side thereof and the electrical components 62 arranged on the radially inner side thereof. Therefore, both heat generated in the stator 50 and heat generated in the electrical components 62 (e.g., heat generated in the semiconductor modules 66) are transmitted to the cylindrical portion 71. Consequently, it is possible to cool both the stator 50 and the semiconductor modules 66 at the same time; thus it is possible to effectively dissipate heat generated by the heat-generating members in the rotating electric machine 10.

Moreover, at least part of the semiconductor modules 66, which constitute part or the whole of the inverter circuits for energizing the stator coil 51 and thereby driving the rotating electric machine, is arranged within a region surrounded by the stator core 52 that is located radially outside the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64. It is preferable that the whole of one of the semiconductor modules 66 is arranged within the region surrounded by the stator core 52. It is more preferable that the whole of each of the semiconductor modules 66 is arranged within the region surrounded by the stator core 52.

Moreover, at least part of the semiconductor modules 66 is arranged within a region surrounded by the cooling water passage 74. It is preferable that the whole of each of the semiconductor modules 66 is arranged within a region surrounded by a yoke 141.

The electrical components 62 include an insulating sheet 75 arranged on one axial end surface of the capacitor module 68 and a wiring module 76 arranged on the other axial end surface of the capacitor module 68. More specifically, the capacitor module 68 has two opposite axial end surfaces, i.e., a first axial end surface and a second axial end surface. The first axial end surface of the capacitor module 68, which is located closer to the bearing unit 20, faces the end surface 72 of the casing 64 and superposed on the end surface 72 with the insulating sheet 75 sandwiched therebetween. The second axial end surface of the capacitor module 68, which is located closer to the opening 65, has the wiring module 76 mounted thereon.

The wiring module 76 has a main body 76 a, which is formed of a synthetic resin material into a discoid shape, and a plurality of busbars 76 b and 76 c embedded in the main body 76 a. The wiring module 76 is electrically connected with the semiconductor modules 66 and the capacitor module 68 via the busbars 76 b and 76 c. More specifically, each of the semiconductor modules 66 has a connection pin 66 a extending from an axial end surface thereof; the connection pin 66 a is connected, on the radially outer side of the main body 76 a, to one of the busbars 76 b. On the other hand, the busbars 76 c extend, on the radially outer side of the main body 76 a, in the axial direction away from the capacitor module 68. To distal end portions of the busbars 76 c, there are respectively connected wiring members 79 (see FIG. 2).

As described above, the capacitor module 68 has the insulating sheet 75 arranged on the first axial end surface thereof and the wiring module 76 arranged on the second axial end surface thereof. With this arrangement, there are formed heat dissipation paths of the capacitor module 68 from the first and second axial end faces of the capacitor module 68 respectively to the end surface 72 and the cylindrical portion 71. That is, there are formed both a heat dissipation path from the first axial end surface of the capacitor module 68 to the end surface 72 and a heat dissipation path from the second axial end surface of the capacitor module 68 to the cylindrical portion 71. Consequently, it becomes possible to dissipate heat generated in the capacitor module 68 via the end surfaces thereof other than the outer circumferential surface on which the semiconductor modules 66 are arranged. That is, it becomes possible to dissipate heat generated in the capacitor module 68 not only in the radial direction but also in the axial direction.

Moreover, the capacitor module 68, which is hollow cylindrical in shape, has the rotating shaft 11 arranged on the radially inner side thereof with a predetermined gap formed therebetween. Consequently, heat generated in the capacitor module 68 can also be dissipated via the hollow space formed therein. In addition, with rotation of the rotating shaft 11, air flow is created in the gap, thereby improving the cooling performance.

To the wiring module 76, there is mounted a control substrate 67 which has a discoid shape. The control substrate 67 includes a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) which has a predetermined wiring pattern formed thereon. On the PCB, there is mounted a controller 77 which is constituted of various ICs and a microcomputer. The controller 77 corresponds to a control unit. The control substrate 67 is fixed to the wiring module 76 by fixtures such as screws. In a central part of the control substrate 67, there is formed an insertion hole 67 a through which the rotating shaft 11 is inserted.

The wiring module 76 has a first surface and a second surface that are opposite to each other in the axial direction, i.e., opposite to each other in the thickness direction thereof. The first surface faces the capacitor module 68. The wiring module 76 has the control substrate 67 provided on the second surface thereof. The busbars 76 c of the wiring module 76 are configured to extend from one surface of the control substrate 67 to the other surface of the control substrate 67. Moreover, in the control substrate 67, there may be formed cuts to prevent interference with the busbars 76 c. For example, the control substrate 67 may have the cuts formed in an outer edge portion of the discoid control substrate 67.

As described above, the electrical components 62 are received in the space surrounded by the casing 64. The housing 30, the rotor 40 and the stator 50 are arranged in layers outside the casing 64. With this arrangement, electromagnetic noise generated in the inverter circuits can be suitably shielded. More specifically, in the inverter circuits, switching control is performed on each of the semiconductor modules 66 by PWM control with a predetermined carrier frequency. Consequently, electromagnetic noise may be generated by the switching control. However, the electromagnetic noise would be suitably shielded by the housing 30, the rotor 40 and the stator 50 on the radially outer side of the electrical components 62.

Moreover, at least part of the semiconductor modules 66 is arranged within the region surrounded by the stator core 52 that is located radially outside the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64. With this arrangement, even if magnetic flux is generated by the semiconductor modules 66, the stator coil 51 would be less affected by the magnetic flux than in the case of the semiconductor modules 66 and the stator coil 51 being arranged without the stator core 52 interposed therebetween. Moreover, even if magnetic flux is generated by the stator coil 51, the semiconductor modules 66 would be less affected by the magnetic flux than in the aforementioned case. In addition, the above advantageous effects would be more remarkable when the whole of each of the semiconductor modules 66 is arranged in the region surrounded by the stator core 52 that is located radially outside the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64. Moreover, with at least part of the semiconductor modules 66 surrounded by the cooling water passage 74, it becomes difficult for heat generated in the stator coil 51 and/or the magnet unit 42 to be transmitted to the semiconductor modules 66.

In the cylindrical portion 71, there are formed through-holes 78 in the vicinity of the end plate 63. Through the through-holes 78, the wiring members 79 (see FIG. 2) are respectively inserted to electrically connect the stator 50 located outside the cylindrical portion 71 with the electrical components 62 located inside the cylindrical portion 71. As shown in FIG. 2, the wiring members 79 are respectively joined, for example by crimping or welding, to end portions of the stator coil 51 as well as to the busbars 76 c of the wiring module 76. It is preferable that the wiring members 79 are implemented by, for example, busbars having joining surfaces crushed flat. The number of the through-holes 78 formed in the cylindrical portion 71 may be single or plural. In the present embodiment, two through-holes 78 are formed respectively at two different locations. Consequently, it becomes possible to easily perform wiring of coil terminals extending from the two three-phase coils. Therefore, the above formation of the through-holes 78 is suitable for making multi-phase electrical connection.

As described above, in the housing 30, as shown in FIG. 4, the rotor 40, the stator 50 and the inverter unit 60 are arranged in this order from the radially outer side to the radially inner side. More specifically, the rotor 40 and the stator 50 are arranged radially outward from the center of rotation of the rotor 40 by more than d×0.705, where d is the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the housing 30. With this arrangement, the area of a transverse cross section of a first region X1 becomes larger than the area of a transverse cross section of a second region X2. Here, the first region X1 denotes the region radially inside the inner circumferential surface of the stator 50 (i.e., the inner circumferential surface of the stator core 52) that is located radially inside the rotor 40; the second region X2 denotes the region radially extending from the inner circumferential surface of the stator 50 to the housing 30. Moreover, in a range where the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 and the stator coil 51 radially overlap each other, the volume of the first region X1 is larger than the volume of the second region X2.

In addition, the rotor 40 and the stator 50 together constitute a magnetic-circuit component assembly. Then, in the housing 30, the volume of the first region X1 radially inside the inner circumferential surface of the magnetic-circuit component assembly is larger than the volume of the second region X2 radially extending from the inner circumferential surface of the magnetic-circuit component assembly to the housing 30.

Next, the configurations of the rotor 40 and the stator 50 will be described in more detail.

There are known stators of rotating electric machines which are generally configured to include a stator core and a stator coil. The stator core is formed by laminating steel sheets into an annular shape. The stator core has a plurality of slots arranged in the circumferential direction. The stator coil is wound in the slots of the stator core. More specifically, the stator core has a plurality of teeth formed, at predetermined intervals, to radially extend from a yoke. Each of the slots is formed between one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the teeth. The stator coil is constituted of electrical conductors that are received in a plurality of radially-aligned layers in the slots of the stator core.

However, with the above structure of the known stators, during energization of the stator coil, with increase in the magnetomotive force of the stator coil, magnetic saturation may occur in the teeth of the stator core, causing the torque density of the rotating electric machine to be limited. More specifically, in the stator core, rotating magnetic flux, which is generated with energization of the stator coil, may concentrate on the teeth, causing the teeth to be magnetically saturated.

Moreover, there are known IPM (Interior Permanent Magnet) rotors of rotating electric machines which are generally configured to have permanent magnets arranged on the d-axis of the d-q coordinate system and a rotor core arranged on the q-axis of the d-q coordinate system. In this case, upon the stator coil in the vicinity of the d-axis being excited, exciting magnetic flux flows from the stator into the q-axis of the rotor according to Fleming's rule. Consequently, magnetic saturation may occur in a wide range in the q-axis core portions of the rotor.

FIG. 7 is a torque diagram illustrating the relationship between the ampere-turns [AT], which represents the magnetomotive force of the stator coil, and the torque density [Nm/L]. A dashed line indicates characteristics of a conventional IPM rotor rotating electric machine. As shown in FIG. 7, in the conventional rotating electric machine, with increase in the magnetomotive force in the stator, magnetic saturation occurs at two locations, i.e., the teeth between the slots and the q-axis core portions, causing increase in the torque to be limited. Hence, in the conventional rotating electric machine, the design value of the ampere-turns is limited by A1. In view of the above, in the present embodiment, to overcome the limitation due to the magnetic saturation, the following structures are employed in the rotating electric machine 10. Specifically, as a first measure, to eliminate magnetic saturation occurring in the teeth of the stator core in the stator, a slot-less structure is employed in the stator 50; moreover, to eliminate magnetic saturation occurring in the q-axis core portions of an IPM rotor, an SPM (Surface Permanent Magnet) rotor is employed. However, with the first measure, though it is possible to eliminate the above-described two locations where magnetic saturation occurs, torque may decrease in a low-electric current region (see the one-dot chain line in FIG. 7). Therefore, as a second measure, to enhance the magnetic flux of the SPM rotor and thereby suppress decrease in the torque, a polar anisotropic structure is employed in which magnet magnetic paths in the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 are lengthened to increase the magnetic force.

Moreover, as a third measure, to suppress decrease in the torque, a flat conductor structure is employed in which the radial thickness of the electrical conductors in the coil side part 53 of the stator coil 51 of the stator 50 is reduced. Here, with employment of the above-described polar anisotropic structure for increasing the magnetic force, higher eddy current may be generated in the stator coil 51 that faces the magnet unit 42. However, with the third measure, it is possible to suppress, by virtue of the radially-thin flat conductor structure, generation of radial eddy current in the stator coil 51. Consequently, with the above first to third structures, it becomes possible to considerably improve the torque characteristics with employment of the high-magnetic force magnets while suppressing generation of high eddy current due to the high-magnetic force magnets, as shown with a solid line in FIG. 7.

Furthermore, as a fourth measure, the magnet unit is employed in which magnetic flux density distribution approximate to a sine wave is realized using the polar anisotropic structure. Consequently, it becomes possible to improve the sine wave matching percentage with the later-described pulse control and thereby increase the torque while more effectively suppressing eddy current loss (i.e., copper loss due to eddy current) with gentler magnetic flux change than radial magnets.

Hereinafter, the sine wave matching percentage will be described. The sine wave matching percentage can be determined based on comparison between the actual waveform of the surface magnetic flux density distribution, which is measured by tracing the surfaces of the magnets using a magnetic flux probe, and a sine wave that has the same period and peak values as the actual waveform. Specifically, the sine wave matching percentage is defined as the ratio of the amplitude of the primary waveform, which is the fundamental wave of the rotating electric machine, to the amplitude of the actual waveform, i.e., the amplitude of the fundamental wave with harmonic components added thereto. With increase in the sine wave matching percentage, the waveform of the surface magnetic flux density distribution approximates the shape of the sine wave. Upon supply of electric current of the primary sine wave from an inverter to the rotating electric machine that includes the magnets with the improved sine wave matching percentage, high torque can be generated due to the waveform of the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnets approximate to the shape of the sine wave. In addition, instead of being actually measured, the surface magnetic flux density distribution may be estimated by, for example, an electromagnetic field analysis using Maxwell's equations.

Furthermore, as a fifth measure, the stator coil 51 is designed to have a wire conductor structure in which wires are bundled together. Consequently, with the wires connected in parallel with each other, it becomes possible to allow high electric current to flow through the electrical conductors. Moreover, since the cross-sectional area of each of the wires is small, it becomes possible to more effectively suppress, than the third measure of reducing the radial thickness of the electrical conductors, generation of eddy current in the electrical conductors that are expanded in the circumferential direction of the stator 50 due to the flat conductor structure. In addition, forming each of the electrical conductors by twisting the wires, with respect to the magnetomotive force of the electrical conductors, it becomes possible to cancel eddy currents, which are induced by magnetic flux generated according to the right-hand rule with respect to the electric current supply direction, by each other.

As above, by further taking the fourth and fifth measures, it becomes possible to employ the high-magnetic force magnets provided by the second measure while suppressing eddy current loss due to the high magnetic force and thereby increasing the torque.

Hereinafter, the slot-less structure of the stator 50, the flat conductor structure of the stator coil 51 and the polar anisotropic structure of the magnet unit 42 will be described in detail. First, the slot-less structure of the stator 50 and the flat conductor structure of the stator coil 51 will be described. FIG. 8 is a transverse cross-sectional view of both the rotor 40 and the stator 50. FIG. 9 is an enlarged view of part of the rotor 40 and the stator 50 shown in FIG. 8. FIG. 10 is a transverse cross-sectional view of the stator 50 which is taken along the line X-X in FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the stator 50. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the stator coil 51. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the magnetization directions of the magnets in the magnet unit 42 are indicated by arrows.

As shown in FIGS. 8-11, the stator core 52 is formed, by laminating a plurality of magnetic steel sheets in the axial direction, to have a hollow cylindrical shape with a predetermined radial thickness. The stator coil 51 is assembled to the radially outer periphery, i.e., the rotor 40-side periphery of the stator core 52. That is, the outer circumferential surface of the stator core 52 on the rotor 40 side constitutes an electrical conductor mounting part (or electrical conductor area). The outer circumferential surface of the stator core 52 is shaped as a smooth curved surface. A plurality of electrical conductor groups 81 are arranged on the outer circumferential surface of the stator core 52 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. The stator core 52 functions as a back yoke to form part of a magnetic circuit for rotating the rotor 40. The stator 50 has a configuration (i.e., slot-less structure) such that between each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor groups 81, there is no tooth formed of a soft-magnetic material (i.e., no iron core). In the present embodiment, each of gaps 56 between the electrical conductor groups 81 is occupied by the resin material of a sealing member 57. That is, in the stator 50, inter-conductor members provided between the electrical conductor groups 81 in the circumferential direction are constituted of the sealing member 57 that is formed of a nonmagnetic material. Before the sealing by the sealing member 57, on the radially outer side of the stator core 52, the electrical conductor groups 81 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction with the gaps 56, which are inter-conductor regions, formed therebetween. Consequently, the stator 50 is constructed which has the slot-less structure. In other words, each of the electrical conductor groups 81 consists of two electrical conductors 82 as will be described later; the gap 56 formed between each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor groups 81 is occupied by only nonmagnetic materials. These nonmagnetic materials include, in addition to the resin material of the sealing member 57, nonmagnetic gas such as air and nonmagnetic liquid. In addition, the sealing member 57 will also be referred to as the inter-conductor member (or conductor-to-conductor member) hereinafter.

The configuration having teeth provided between electrical conductor groups 81 arranged in the circumferential direction is a configuration where: each of the teeth has a predetermined radial thickness and a predetermined circumferential width; and part of the magnetic circuit, i.e., magnet magnetic paths are formed between the electrical conductor groups 81. In contrast, the configuration having no teeth provided between the electrical conductor groups 81 is a configuration where the above magnetic circuit is not formed between the electrical conductor groups 81.

As shown in FIG. 10, the stator coil (or armature coil) 51 is formed to have a predetermined thickness T2 (hereinafter, to be also referred to as the first dimension) and a predetermined width W2 (hereinafter, to be also referred to as the second dimension). The thickness T2 is represented by the minimum distance between a radially outer side surface and a radially inner side surface of the stator coil 51. The width W2 is represented by the circumferential length of each part of the stator coil 51 which functions as one of the plurality of phases of the stator coil 51 (three phases in the embodiment: the three phases of U, V and W or the three phases of X, Y and Z). Specifically, in FIG. 10, one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor groups 81 functions as one of three phases, for example the U phase; the distance between two ends of the pair of the electrical conductor groups 81 in the circumferential direction represents the width W2. Moreover, the thickness T2 is set to be smaller than the width W2.

In addition, it is preferable that the thickness T2 is smaller than the sum of widths of two electrical conductor groups 81 present within the width W2. Moreover, in the case of the cross-sectional shape of the stator coil 51 (more specifically, the electrical conductors 82) being a perfect circle, ellipse or polygon, in a cross section of each of the electrical conductors 82 along the radial direction of the stator 50, the maximum radial length of the cross section may be designated by W12 and the maximum circumferential length of the cross section may be designated by W11.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the stator coil 51 is sealed by the sealing member 57 that is formed of a synthetic resin material that is a sealing material (or molding material). That is, the stator coil 51 is molded together with the stator core 52 by the molding material. In addition, a resin is a nonmagnetic material or an equivalent of a nonmagnetic material; thereof, the saturation flux density Bs of a resin can be regarded as being equal to zero, i.e., Bs=0.

As seen from the transverse cross-sectional view of FIG. 10, the gaps 56 between the electrical conductor groups 81 are filled with the synthetic resin material forming the sealing member 57. The sealing member 57 constitutes an electrically insulating member interposed between the electrical conductor groups 81. In other words, the sealing member 57 functions as an electrically insulating member in the gaps 56. The sealing member 57 is provided, on the radially outer side of the stator core 52, in a region encompassing all the electrical conductor groups 81, i.e., in a region whose radial thickness is larger than the radial thickness of the electrical conductor groups 81.

Moreover, as seen from the longitudinal cross-sectional view of FIG. 11, the sealing member 57 is provided in regions encompassing turn portions 84 of the stator coil 51. On the radially inner side of the stator coil 51, the sealing member 57 is provided in regions encompassing at least part of axially opposite end surfaces of the stator core 52. In this case, except for end portions of the phase windings, i.e., except for connection terminals connected with the inverter circuits, the stator coil 51 is substantially entirely resin-sealed.

With the sealing member 57 provided in the regions encompassing the end surfaces of the stator core 52, it is possible to press, by the sealing member 57, the laminated steel sheets of the stator core 52 axially inward. Consequently, with the sealing member 57, it is possible to maintain the laminated state of the steel sheets. In addition, in the present embodiment, the inner circumferential surface of the stator core 52 is not resin-sealed. As an alternative, the entire stator core 52 including the inner circumferential surface thereof may be resin-sealed.

In the case of the rotating electric machine 10 being used as a vehicular power source, it is preferable that the sealing member 57 is formed of a highly heat-resistant fluorocarbon resin, epoxy resin, PPS resin, PEEK resin, LCP resin, silicon resin, PAI resin or PI resin. In terms of suppressing occurrence of cracking due to a difference in coefficient of linear expansion, it is preferable that the sealing member 57 is formed of the same material as insulating coats of the electrical conductors of the stator coil 51. That is, it is preferable that silicon resins, whose coefficients of linear expansion are generally higher than twice those of other resins, are excluded from candidates for the material of the sealing member 57. Furthermore, in electrical products having no combustion engine, such as an electrical vehicle, a PPO resin, a phenol resin or an FRP resin, which have heat resistance of about 180° C., may be used as the material forming the sealing member 57. In addition, in fields where the ambient temperature of the rotating electric machine 10 is lower than 100° C., the material for forming the sealing member 57 is not limited to the aforementioned candidates.

The torque of the rotating electric machine 10 is proportional to the amplitude of magnetic flux. In the case of a stator core having teeth, the maximum amount of magnetic flux in the stator is limited depending on the saturation flux density at the teeth. In contrast, in the case of a stator core having no teeth, the maximum amount of magnetic flux in the stator is not limited. Therefore, the slot-less structure is advantageous in terms of increasing electric current supplied to the stator coil 51 and thereby increasing the torque of the rotating electric machine 10.

In the present embodiment, the inductance of the stator 50 is lowered by employing the toothless structure (or slot-less structure) in the stator 50. Specifically, the inductance of a stator of a conventional rotating electric machine, which has electrical conductors received in slots partitioned by teeth, is, for example, about 1 mH. In contrast, the inductance of the stator 50 according to the present embodiment is lowered to be 5-60 μH. Consequently, in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to lower the mechanical time constant Tm through the reduction in the inductance of the stator 50 while configuring the rotating electric machine 10 to have an outer rotor structure. That is, it becomes possible to achieve both increase in the torque and reduction in the mechanical constant Tm. In addition, the mechanical time constant Tm can be calculated by the following equation:

Tm=(J×L)/(Kt×Ke)

where J is the inertia, L is the inductance, Kt is the torque constant and Ke is the counterelectromotive force constant. From the above equation, it is clear that the mechanical time constant Tm decreases with decrease in the inductance L.

Each of the electrical conductor groups 81 on the radially outer side of the stator core 52 is comprised of a plurality of electrical conductors 82 that each have a flat rectangular cross section and are arranged in alignment with each other in a radial direction of the stator core 52. Moreover, each of the electrical conductors 82 is oriented so that in a transverse cross section thereof, (the radial dimension <the circumferential dimension). Consequently, each of the electrical conductor groups 81 becomes thinner in the radial direction. Meanwhile, the regions of the electrical conductors are expanded flat to those regions which would be conventionally occupied by teeth, thereby realizing a flat conductor region structure. Consequently, increase in the amount of heat generated by the electrical conductors, which would otherwise be caused by the reduction in the radial dimension and thus reduction in the cross-sectional area of each of the electrical conductors, is suppressed by suppressing reduction in the cross-sectional area of each of the electrical conductors through the increase in the circumferential dimension. In addition, with a configuration of arranging a plurality of electrical conductors in circumferential alignment with each other and connecting them in parallel with each other, though the cross-sectional area of each of the electrical conductors is reduced by an amount corresponding to the thickness of insulating coats of the electrical conductors, it is still possible to achieve the same effects as described above. It should be noted that hereinafter, each of the electrical conductor groups 81 and each of the electrical conductors 82 will also be referred to as “conductive member”.

In the present embodiment, with the slot-less structure of the stator 50, it becomes possible to set the conductor regions occupied by the stator coil 51 to be greater than non-conductor regions not occupied by the stator coil 51 in each turn in the circumferential direction. In addition, in a conventional rotating electric machine for a vehicle, the ratio of the conductor regions to the non-conductor regions in each turn in the circumferential direction is generally lower than or equal to 1. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the electrical conductor groups 81 are configured to have the conductor regions equal to the non-conductor regions or greater than the non-conductor regions. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, the circumferential width WA of each of the conductor regions occupied by the electrical conductors 82 (or, straight portions 83 to be described later) is set to be larger than the circumferential width WB of each of the inter-conductor regions between the adjacent electrical conductors 82.

In the stator coil 51, the radial thickness of the electrical conductor groups 81 is set to be smaller than the circumferential width of the electrical conductor groups 81 per phase in each magnetic pole. More specifically, each of the electrical conductor groups 81 consists of two radially-stacked electrical conductors 82. In each region corresponding to one magnetic pole, there are provided two circumferentially-adjacent electrical conductor groups 81 per phase. Then, the following relationship is satisfied: Tc×2<Wc×2, where Tc is the radial thickness of each of the electrical conductors 82 and Wc is the circumferential width of each of the electrical conductors 82. In addition, in an alternative configuration, each of the electrical conductor groups 81 consists of two radially-stacked electrical conductors 82; in each region corresponding to one magnetic pole, there is provided only one electrical conductor group 81 per phase. In this case, the following relationship is satisfied: Tc×2<Wc. That is, in the stator coil 51, for the electrical conductor sections (i.e., electrical conductor groups 81) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, the radial thickness of each of the electrical conductor sections is set to be smaller than the circumferential width of one or more electrical conductor sections provided per phase in each region corresponding to one magnetic pole.

In other words, the radial thickness Tc of each of the electrical conductors 82 is preferably set to be smaller than the circumferential width Wc of each of the electrical conductors 82. Further, the radial thickness (i.e., 2Tc) of each of the electrical conductor groups 81, which consists of two radially-stacked electrical conductors 82, is preferably set to be smaller than the circumferential width Wc of each of the electrical conductor groups 81.

The torque of the rotating electric machine 10 is approximately in inverse proportion to the radial thickness of the electrical conductor groups 81. Therefore, the torque of the rotating electric machine 10 can be increased by reducing the radial thickness of the electrical conductor groups 81 on the radially outer side of the stator core 52. This is because with reduction in the radial thickness of the electrical conductor groups 81, the distance from the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 to the stator core 52 (i.e., the distance across a portion containing no iron) is shortened, thereby lowering the magnetic reluctance. Consequently, it is possible to increase the magnetic flux generated by the permanent magnets and crossing the stator core 52, thereby increasing the torque.

Moreover, with reduction in the radial thickness of the electrical conductor groups 81, it becomes easier for leakage magnetic flux from the electrical conductor groups 81 to be recovered by the stator core 52. Consequently, it becomes possible to suppress the magnetic flux from leaking outside without being effectively used for improvement of the torque. That is, it becomes possible to suppress the magnetic force from being lowered due to leakage of the magnetic flux and increase the magnetic flux generated by the permanent magnets and crossing the stator core 52, thereby increasing the torque.

Each of the electrical conductors 82 is implemented by a covered electrical conductor that includes a conductor body 82 a and an insulating coat 82 b covering the surface of the conductor body 82 a. Therefore, electrical insulation is secured between each radially-stacked pair of the electrical conductors 82 and between the electrical conductors 82 and the stator core 52. As will be described later, the conductor body 82 a is constituted of a bundle of wires 86. In the case of each of the wires 86 being a coated wire, the insulating coat 82 b may be constituted of self-fusing coats of the wires 86. Otherwise, the insulating coat 82 b may be constituted of an insulating member provided separately from the coats of the wires 86 b. In addition, the electrical insulation of the phase windings formed of the electrical conductors 82 is secured, except for exposed portions of the phase windings for making electrical connection, by the insulating coats 82 b of the electrical conductors 82. These exposed portions of the phase windings include, for example, input/output terminal portions, and neutral terminal portions when the phase windings are star-connected. In each of the electrical conductor groups 81, the radially-adjacent electrical conductors 82 are fixed to each other by the self-fused insulating coats of the electrical conductors and/or an insulating resin applied separately from the insulating coats. Consequently, it is possible to prevent electrical breakdown from occurring due to the electrical conductors 82 rubbing against each other and to suppress vibration and noise.

In the present embodiment, the conductor body 82 a of each of the electrical conductors 82 is constituted of a bundle of wires 86. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the conductor body 82 a is formed, by twisting the wires 86, into the shape of a twine. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 14, each of the wires 86 is constituted of a bundle of electrically conductive fibers 87. The fibers 87 are implemented by, for example, CNT (carbon nanotube) fibers. The CNT fibers are micro fibers which are obtained by substituting at least part of carbon with boron. The fibers 87 may alternatively be implemented by other carbon micro fibers, such as Vapor Grown Carbon Fibers (VGCF). However, it is preferable for the fibers 87 to be implemented by CNT fibers. In addition, the surface of each of the wires 86 is covered with an electrically-insulative polymer coat, such as an enamel coat. Moreover, it is preferable that the surface of each of the wires 86 is covered with an enamel coat, such as a polyimide coat or an amide-imide coat.

The electrical conductors 82 together form windings of n phases in the stator coil 51. In each of the electrical conductors 82 (more specifically, each of the conductor bodies 82 a), all the wires 86 are adjacent to and in contact with one another. Moreover, in each of the electrical conductors 82, there is at least one place per phase where the wires 86 are twisted together. The electrical resistances between the twisted wires 86 are higher than the electrical resistance of each of the wires 86. Specifically, for each adjacent pair of the wires 86, a first electrical resistivity in the direction in which the wires 86 adjoin each other is higher than a second electrical resistivity in the longitudinal direction of each of the wires 86. In addition, each of the electrical conductors 82 may be constituted of a wire bundle in which the wires 86 are covered with an insulating member having extremely high first electrical resistivity. Moreover, the conductor body 82 a of each of the electrical conductors 82 is constituted of the wires 86 that are twisted together.

Since the conductor body 82 a is constituted of the wires 86 that are twisted together, it becomes possible to suppress generation of eddy current in each of the wires 86, thereby reducing eddy current in the conductor body 82 a. Moreover, each of the wires 86 is twisted to have portions where the magnetic field application directions are opposite to each other; therefore, the counterelectromotive forces generated in these portions are canceled by each other. Consequently, it becomes possible to achieve further reduction in the eddy current. In particular, since each of the wires 86 is constituted of the electrically conductive fibers 87, it becomes possible to make each element of the wire 86 extremely thin and considerably increase the number of twists in the wire 86, thereby more effectively reducing the eddy current.

In addition, the method of insulating between the wires 86 is not limited to employment of the above electrically-insulative polymer coat. As an alternative, it may be possible to make it difficult for electric current to flow between the wires 86 by increasing the contact resistance therebetween. That is, when the resistance between the twisted wires 86 is higher than the resistance of each of the wires 86, it is possible to achieve the above effect by virtue of the electric potential difference caused by the resistance difference. For example, the contact resistance between the wires 86 may be preferably increased by: arranging the manufacturing equipment for manufacturing the wires 86 and the manufacturing equipment for manufacturing the stator 50 (or armature) of the rotating electric machine 10 to be separate from each other; and having the wires 86 oxidized during the delivery time and operation intervals.

As described above, the electrical conductors 82 each have a flat rectangular cross section and are arranged in radial alignment with each other. The shape of each of the electrical conductors 82 is maintained by: covering the surface of each of the wires 86 forming the electrical conductor 82 with a self-fusing insulating layer; and having the self-fusing insulating layers of the wires 86 fused. As an alternative, the shape of each of the electrical conductors 82 may be maintained by: twisting together the wires 86 with or without self-fusing insulating layers respectively covering the surfaces thereof; and fixing the twisted wires 86 together in a desired shape using a synthetic resin. The thickness of the insulating coat 82 b of each of the electrical conductors 82 may be set to be, for example, 80-100 μm and thus larger than the thicknesses of insulating coats of generally-used electrical conductors which are 5-40 μm. In this case, it is possible to ensure electrical insulation between the electrical conductors 82 and the stator core 52 without interposing insulating paper therebetween.

It is preferable for the insulating coats 82 b of the electrical conductors 82 to be configured to have higher insulating performance than the insulating layers of the wires 86 and to be capable of making inter-phase insulation. For example, in the case of the polymer insulating layers of the wires 86 having a thickness of, for example, about 5 μm, it is preferable for the insulating coats 82 b of the electrical conductors 82 to have a thickness of 80-100 μm, thereby securing suitable inter-phase insulation. Moreover, each of the electrical conductors 82 may be constituted of a bundle of wires 86 that are bundled together without being twisted. That is, each of the electrical conductors 82 may have any one of a configuration where the wires 86 are twisted over the entire length of the electrical conductor 82, a configuration where the wires 86 are twisted for only part of the entire length of the electrical conductor 82 and a configuration where the wires 86 are bundled together without being twisted over the entire length of the electrical conductor 82. To sum up, each of the electrical conductors 82 forming the electrical conductor sections is constituted of a wire bundle where a plurality of wires 86 are bundled together and the electrical resistances between the bundled wires 86 are higher than the electrical resistance of each of the wires 86.

The electrical conductors 82 are bent so as to be arranged in a predetermined pattern in the circumferential direction of the stator coil 51. Consequently, each phase winding of the stator coil 51 is formed. As shown in FIG. 12, straight portions 83 of the electrical conductors 82, each of which extends straight in the axial direction, together constitute the coil side part 53 of the stator coil 51; turn portions 84 of the electrical conductors 82, each of which protrudes from the coil side part 53 toward one side in the axial direction, together constitute the coil end 54 of the stator coil 51; turn portions 84 of the electrical conductors 82, each of which protrudes from the coil side part 53 toward the other side in the axial direction, together constitute the coil end 55 of the stator coil 51. Each of the electrical conductors 82 is configured as a wave-wound continuous electrical conductor where the straight portions 83 are formed alternately with the turn portions. The straight portions 83 of the electrical conductors 82 are located to radially face the magnet unit 42. Each pair of the straight portions 83, which belong to the same phase and are spaced at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction, are connected with each other by one of the turn portions 84 on an axially outer side of the magnet unit 42. In addition, the straight portions 83 correspond to “magnet facing portions”.

In the present embodiment, the stator coil 51 is wound in a distributed winding manner into an annular shape. In the coil side part 53 of the stator coil 51, for each phase, the straight portions 83 of each of the electrical conductors 82 belonging to the phase are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals corresponding to one pole pair of the magnet unit 42. In the coil ends 54 and 55 of the stator coil 51, for each phase, the straight portions 83 of each of the electrical conductors 82 belonging to the phase are connected with one another by the substantially V-shaped turn portions 84 of the electrical conductor 82. For each pair of the straight portions 83 corresponding to one pole pair, the directions of electric currents respectively flowing in the straight portions 83 of the pair are opposite to each other. Moreover, those pairs of the straight portions 83 which are connected by the respective turn portions 84 in the coil end 54 are different from those pairs of the straight portions 83 which are connected by the respective turn portions 84 in the coil end 55. The connection of the straight portions 83 by the turn portions 84 in the coil ends 54 and 55 is repeated in the circumferential direction, forming the stator coil 51 into the substantially hollow cylindrical shape.

More specifically, each phase winding of the stator coil 51 is formed of two pairs of the electrical conductors 82. The first three-phase coil (U, V and W phases) and the second three-phase coil (X, Y and Z phases), which together constitute the stator coil 51, are provided in two radial layers. Let S be the number of phases of the stator coil 51 (i.e., 6 in the embodiment), and let m be the number of the electrical conductors 82 per phase. Then, the number of the electrical conductors 82 per pole pair is equal to 2×S×m=2Sm. In the present embodiment, S is equal to 6, m is equal to 4, and the rotating electric machine has 8 pole pairs (or 16 poles). Accordingly, the total number of the electrical conductors 82 arranged in the circumferential direction of the stator core 52 is equal to 6×4×8=192.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the coil side part 53 of the stator coil 51, the straight portions 83 of the electrical conductors 82 are stacked in two radially-adjacent layers. In the coil ends 54 and 55 of the stator coil 51, for each radially-stacked pair of the straight portions 83 of the electrical conductors 82, those two turn portions 84 of the electrical conductors 82 which are respectively connected with the pair of the straight portions 83 extend respectively toward opposite sides in the circumferential direction. That is, for each radially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductors 82, the orientations of the turn portions 84 of one of the pair of the electrical conductors 82 are opposite to those of the turn portions 84 of the other of the pair of the electrical conductors 82 except for end portions of the stator coil 51.

Hereinafter, the winding structure of the electrical conductors 82 forming the stator coil 51 will be described in more detail. In the present embodiment, the wave-shaped electrical conductors 82 are arranged in a plurality (e.g., two) of radially-adjacent layers. FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) together illustrate the layout of the electrical conductors 82 at the nth layer. Specifically, FIG. 15(a) shows the shapes of the electrical conductors 82 viewed from the radially outer side of the stator coil 51. FIG. 15(b) shows the shapes of the electrical conductors 82 viewed from one axial side of the stator coil 51. In FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b), the positions at which the electrical conductor groups 81 are arranged are respectively designated by D1, D2, D3, . . . , and D9. Moreover, for the sake of convenience of explanation, there are illustrated only three electrical conductors 82, i.e., a first electrical conductor 82_A, a second electrical conductor 82_B and a third electrical conductor 82_C.

In each of the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C, all the straight portions 83 are located at the nth layer, i.e., located at the same radial position. Each pair of the straight portions 83, which are circumferentially apart from each other by six positions (corresponding to 3×m pairs), is connected by one of the turn portions 84. More specifically, in each of the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C, all of the seven straight portions 83 are arranged, on the same circle centering on the axis of the rotor 40, to be adjacent to one another in the circumferential direction of the stator coil 51. Moreover, each pair of ends of the straight portions 83 are connected by one of the turn portions 84. For example, in the first electrical conductor 82_A, two straight portions 83, which are arranged respectively at the positions D1 and D7, are connected by one turn portion 84 that has an inverted V-shape. The second electrical conductor 82_B is circumferentially offset from the first electrical conductor 82_A by one position at the same nth layer. The third electrical conductor 82_C is circumferentially offset from the second electrical conductor 82_B by one position at the same nth layer. In this case, since all the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C are arranged at the same layer, the turn portions 84 of these electrical conductors may interfere with one another. Therefore, in the present embodiment, each of the turn portions 84 of the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C has part thereof radially offset to form an interference prevention part.

Specifically, each of the turn portions 84 of the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C is configured to include an oblique part 84 a, an apex part 84 b, an oblique part 84 c and a return part 84 d. The oblique part 84 a circumferentially extends on the same circle (first circle). The apex part 84 b extends from the oblique part 84 a radially inward (i.e., upward in FIG. 15(b)) of the first circle to reach another circle (second circle). The oblique part 84 c circumferentially extends on the second circle. The return part 84 d returns from the second circle to the first circle. The apex part 84 b, the oblique part 84 c and the return part 84 d together correspond to the interference prevention part. In addition, each of the turn portions 84 may alternatively be configured to have the oblique part 84 c offset from the oblique part 84 a radially outward.

That is, in each of the turn portions 84 of the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C, the oblique part 84 a and the oblique part 84 c are located respectively on opposite sides of the apex part 84 b that is circumferential centered in the turn portion 84. Moreover, the oblique part 84 a and the oblique part 84 c are different from each other in radial position (i.e., position in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 15(a); position in the vertical direction in FIG. 15(b)). For example, the turn portion 84 of the first electrical conductor 82_A first extends in the circumferential direction from the position D1 at the nth layer which is the start position, then is bent radially (e.g., radially inward) at the apex part 84 b that is circumferentially centered in the turn portion 84, then is further bent circumferentially to extend again in the circumferential direction, and thereafter is bent radially (e.g., radially outward) at the return part 84 d to reach to the position D7 at the nth layer which is the end position.

With the above configuration, the oblique parts 84 a of the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C are arranged from the upper side in the vertical direction in the order of the first electrical conductor 82_A, the second electrical conductor 82_B and the third electrical conductor 82_C. The arrangement order of the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C is inverted at the apex parts 84 b so that the oblique parts 84 c of the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C are arranged from the upper side in the vertical direction in the order of the third electrical conductor 82_C, the second electrical conductor 82_B and the first electrical conductor 82_A. Consequently, it becomes possible to arrange the electrical conductors 82_A to 82_C in the circumferential direction without causing interference therebetween.

Moreover, each of the electrical conductor groups 81 consists of a plurality of radially-stacked electrical conductors 82. For each of the electrical conductor groups 81, the turn portions 84 of the electrical conductors 82 of the group may be arranged more radially apart from each other than the straight portions 83 of the electrical conductors 82 are. Furthermore, in the case of the electrical conductors 82 of the same group being bent to the same radial side at the boundaries between the straight portions 83 and the turn portions 84, it is necessary to prevent electrical insulation from being degraded due to interference between the radially-adjacent electrical conductors 82.

For example, at the positions D7-D9 in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b), the radially-stacked electrical conductors 82 are bent radially at the return parts 84 d of the respective turn portions 84 thereof. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16, the radius of curvature of the bend of the nth-layer electrical conductor 82 may be set to be different from the radius of curvature of the bend of the (n+1)th-layer electrical conductor 82. More specifically, the radius of curvature R1 of the radially inner (i.e., the nth layer) electrical conductor 82 may be set to be smaller than the radius of curvature R2 of the radially outer (i.e., the (n+1)th layer) electrical conductor 82.

Moreover, the amount of radial shift of the nth-layer electrical conductor 82 may be set to be different from the amount of radial shift of the (n+1)th-layer electrical conductor 82. More specifically, the amount of radial shift 51 of the radially inner (i.e., the nth layer) electrical conductor 82 may be set to be larger than the amount of radial shift S2 of the radially outer (i.e., the (n+1)th layer) electrical conductor 82.

With the above configuration, even with the radially-stacked electrical conductors 82 bent in the same direction, it is still possible to reliably prevent interference between the electrical conductors 82. Consequently, it is possible to ensure high insulation properties.

Next, the structure of the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the magnet unit 42 is constituted of permanent magnets whose residual flux density Br is higher than or equal to 1.0[T] and intrinsic coercive force Hcj is higher than or equal to 400 [kA/m]. More particularly, in the present embodiment, the permanent magnets are implemented by sintered magnets that are obtained by shaping and solidifying a granular magnetic material by sintering. The intrinsic coercive force Hcj of the permanent magnets on the J-H curve is higher than or equal to 400 [kA/m], and the residual flux density Br of the permanent magnets is higher than or equal to 1.0[T]. When 5000-10000[AT] is applied by interphase excitation, if the magnetic length of one pole pair, i.e., the magnetic length of one N pole and one S pole, in other words, the length of a magnetic flux flow path extending between one pair of N and S poles through the inside of the employed permanent magnets is equal to 25 [mm], Hcj is equal to 10000[A] and thus the permanent magnets are not demagnetized.

In other words, the magnet unit 42 is configured so that: the saturation flux density Js is higher than or equal to 1.2[T]; the grain size is smaller than or equal to 10[μm]; and Js×α is higher than or equal to 1.0[T], where α is the orientation ratio.

Hereinafter, supplemental explanation will be given of the magnet unit 42. The magnet unit 42 (i.e., magnets) is characterized in that 2.15[T]≥Js≥1.2[T]. In other words, as the magnets of the magnet unit 42, NdFe11TiN magnets, Nd2Fe14B magnets, Sm2Fe17N3 magnets or L10-type FeNi magnets may be employed. In addition, SmCo5 magnets which are generally called samarium-cobalt magnets, FePt magnets, Dy2Fe14B magnets and CoPt magnets cannot be employed as the magnets of the magnet unit 42. On the other hand, magnets, which are formed of the same-type compounds, such as Dy2Fe14B and Nd2Fe14B, to have the high coercive force of dysprosium that is a heavy rare-earth element while only slightly losing the high Js characteristics of neodymium, may satisfy 2.15[T]>Js>1.2[T]. In this case, these magnets may be employed as the magnets of the magnet unit 42. In addition, these magnets may be referred to, for example, as [Nd1−xDyx]2Fe14B magnets. Furthermore, the magnets of the magnet unit 42 may be formed of two or more types of materials having different compositions, such as FeNi plus Sm2Fe17N3. For example, magnets, which are formed by adding a small amount of Dy2Fe14B whose Js is lower than 1[T] to Nd2Fe14B whose Js is equal to 1.6[T] to improve the coercive force, may be employed as the magnets of the magnet unit 42.

Moreover, in the case of the rotating electric machine being operated at a temperature outside the temperature range of human activities, such as a temperature higher than or equal to 60° C. exceeding the temperature of a desert, or being used as an electric motor in a vehicle where the temperature reaches 80° C. in summer, it is preferable for the magnets of the magnet unit 42 to contain a component having a low temperature coefficient, such as FeNi or Sm2Fe17N3. This is because when the rotating electric machine is operated in a temperature range from about −40° C. (within the temperature range of human activities in Northern Europe) to 60° C. or higher (exceeding the temperature of a desert) or to the heatproof temperature of coil enamel coats (e.g., 180-240° C.), the motor characteristics of the rotating electric machine in the motor operation depend greatly on the temperature coefficient of the magnets of the magnet unit 42; consequently, it becomes difficult to ensure optimal control with the same motor driver. The temperature coefficients of L10-type FeNi and Sm2Fe17N3 are lower than half the temperature coefficient of Nd2Fe14B. Therefore, forming the magnets of the magnet unit 42 with L10-type FeNi or Sm2Fe17N3, it is possible to effectively reduce the burden on the motor driver.

The magnet unit 42 is also characterized in that the grain size in a fine powder state before orientation is smaller than or equal to 10 μm and larger than or equal to the single-domain grain size. In general, the coercive force of magnets can be increased by reducing the size of the grains of the powder to the order of several hundred nanometers. Therefore, in recent years, powders have been used whose grains are reduced in size as small as possible. However, if the grain size was too small, the BH product of the magnets would be lowered due to, for example, oxidization. Therefore, it is preferable that the grain size is larger than or equal to the single-domain grain size. That is, to increase the coercive force, the grains of the powder may be reduced in size preferably to the extent that the grain size is not smaller than the single-domain grain size. In addition, the term “grain size” used hereinafter denotes the grain size in a fine powder state in an orientation step of the magnet manufacturing process.

Furthermore, each of first magnets 91 and second magnets 92 of the magnet unit 42 is implemented by a sintered magnet that is formed by sintering, i.e., heating and consolidating magnetic powder. The sintering is performed so as to satisfy the conditions that: the saturation magnetization Js of the magnet unit 42 is higher than or equal to 1.2T; the grain size of the first and second magnets 91 and 92 is smaller than or equal to 10 μm; and Js×α is higher than or equal to 1.0T (Tesla), where a is the orientation ratio. Moreover, each of the first and second magnets 91 and 92 is sintered so as to satisfy the following conditions as well. In the orientation step of the magnet manufacturing process, orientation is performed on the first and second magnets 91 and 92. Consequently, the first and second magnets 91 and 92 have the orientation ratio unlike the magnetic force direction defined by a magnetization step for isotropic magnets. In the present embodiment, the orientation ratio of the first and second magnets 91 and 92 is set to be so high as to satisfy Jr≥Js×α≥1.0[T] with the saturation magnetization Js of the magnet unit 42 being higher than or equal to 1.2[T]. For example, in the case of each of the first and second magnets 91 and 92 having six easy axes of magnetization, if five of the six easy axes are oriented in the same direction A10 and the remaining one is oriented in a direction B10 that is inclined by 90 degrees to the direction A10, then α=⅚. Otherwise, if the remaining easy axis is oriented in a direction B10 that is inclined by 45 degrees to the direction A10, then the component of the remaining easy axis in the direction A10 is equal to cos 45°=0.707 and thus α=(5+0.707)/6. As described previously, in the present embodiment, the first and second magnets 91 and 92 are formed by sintering. However, provided that the above conditions are satisfied, the first and second magnets 91 and 92 may alternatively be formed by other methods, such as a method of forming MQ3 magnets.

In the present embodiment, permanent magnets are employed whose easy axes of magnetization are controlled by orientation. Consequently, it becomes possible to increase the magnetic circuit length inside the magnets in comparison with the magnetic circuit length inside conventional linearly-oriented magnets of 1.0[T] or higher. That is, it becomes possible to achieve the same magnetic circuit length per pole pair with a smaller volume of the magnets in comparison with conventional linearly-oriented magnets. Moreover, even if the permanent magnets are subjected to a severe high-temperature condition, it is still possible to maintain the reversible demagnetization range. Furthermore, the inventor of the present application has found a configuration with which it is possible to realize characteristics approximate to those of polar anisotropic magnets using conventional magnets.

In addition, an easy axis of magnetization denotes a crystal orientation in a magnet along which it is easy for the magnet to be magnetized. The orientation of easy axes of magnetization in a magnet is represented by the direction in which the orientation ratio is higher than or equal to 50%; the orientation ratio indicates the degree of alignment of the easy axes of magnetization. Otherwise, the orientation of easy axes of magnetization in a magnet is the direction which represents the average orientation of the magnet.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the magnet unit 42 is annular-shaped and arranged on the inner side of the magnet holder 41 (more specifically, on the radially inner side of the cylindrical portion 43). The magnet unit 42 is constituted of the first and second magnets 91 and 92 each of which is a polar anisotropic magnet. The polarity of the first magnets 91 is different from the polarity of the second magnets 92. The first magnets 91 are arranged alternately with the second magnets 92 in the circumferential direction. The first magnets 91 form N poles in the vicinity of the stator coil 51 while the second magnets 92 form S poles in the vicinity of the stator coil 51. The first and second magnets 91 and 92 are permanent magnets constituted of rare-earth magnets such as neodymium magnets.

As shown in FIG. 9, in each of the first and second magnets 91 and 92, the magnetization direction extends in an arc shape between the d-axis (i.e., direct-axis) and the q-axis (i.e., quadrature-axis) in the well-known d-q coordinate system. The d-axis represents the center of the magnetic pole while the q-axis represents the boundary between one pair of N and S poles (in other words, the magnetic flux density is 0T on the q-axis). Moreover, in each of the first and second magnets 91 and 92, on the d-axis, the magnetization direction becomes coincident with a radial direction of the annular magnet unit 42; on the q-axis, the magnetization direction becomes coincident with the circumferential direction of the annular magnet unit 42. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, each of the first and second magnets 91 and 92 is configured to have a first part 250 and two second parts 260 located respectively on opposite sides of the first part 250 in the circumferential direction of the magnet unit 42. That is, the first portion 250 is located closer than the second parts 260 to the d-axis; the second portions 260 are located closer than the first part 250 to the q-axis. The magnet unit 42 is configured so that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization 300 of the first part 250 is more parallel than the direction of the easy axis of magnetization 310 of each of the second parts 260 to the d-axis. In other words, the magnet unit 42 is configured so that the angle θ11 between the d-axis and the easy axis of magnetization 300 of the first part 250 is smaller than the angle θ12 between the q-axis and the easy axis of magnetization 310 of each of the second parts 260.

More specifically, the angle θ11 is the angle between the d-axis and the easy axis of magnetization 300 with the direction from the stator 50 (or armature) toward the magnet unit 42 along the d-axis being defined as positive. The angle θ12 is the angle between the q-axis and the easy axis of magnetization 310 with the direction from the stator 50 toward the magnet unit 42 along the q-axis being defined as positive. In the present embodiment, both the angle θ11 and the angle θ12 are smaller than 90°. Here, each of the easy axes of magnetization 300 and 310 is defined as follows. In each of the parts of the magnets 91 and 92, in the case of one easy axis of magnetization being oriented in the direction A11 and another easy axis of magnetization being oriented in the direction B11, the absolute value of the cosine of an angle θ between the direction A11 and the direction B11 (i.e., |cos θ|) is defined as the easy axis of magnetization 300 or 310.

That is, in each of the first and second magnets 91 and 92, the direction of the easy axis of magnetization on the d-axis side (or in the d-axis-side part) is different from the direction of the easy axis of magnetization on the q-axis side (or in the q-axis-side parts). On the d-axis side, the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is close to a direction parallel the d-axis. In contrast, on the q-axis side, the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is close to a direction perpendicular to the q-axis. Consequently, arc-shaped magnetic paths are formed in the magnet along the direction of the easy axis of magnetization. In addition, in each of the first and second magnets 91 and 92, on the d-axis side, the easy axis of magnetization may be oriented to be parallel to the d-axis; on the q-axis side, the easy axis of magnetization may be oriented to be perpendicular to the q-axis.

Moreover, in each of the magnets 91 and 92, a stator-side peripheral surface on the stator 50 side (i.e., lower side in FIG. 9) and end surfaces on the q-axis side in the circumferential direction constitute magnetic flux acting surfaces through which magnetic flux flows into or out of the magnet. The magnetic paths are formed in the magnet to connect the magnetic flux acting surfaces (i.e., the stator-side peripheral surface and the q-axis-side end surfaces) of the magnet.

In the magnet unit 42, magnetic flux flows along the arc-shaped magnetic paths between the adjacent N and S poles, i.e., between the adjacent magnets 91 and 92. Therefore, the magnet magnetic paths are lengthened in comparison with the case of employing, for example, radial anisotropic magnets. Consequently, as shown in FIG. 17, the magnetic flux density distribution becomes approximate to a sine wave. As a result, as shown in FIG. 18, unlike the magnetic flux density distribution in a comparative example where radial anisotropic magnets are employed, it becomes possible to concentrate magnetic flux on the magnetic pole center side, thereby increasing the torque of the rotating electric machine 10. Moreover, it can be seen that the magnetic flux density distribution in the magnet unit 42 according to the present embodiment is also different from the magnetic flux density distribution in a comparison example where magnets are arranged in a conventional Halbach array. In addition, in each of FIGS. 17 and 18, the horizontal axis represents electrical angle and the vertical axis represents magnetic flux density; 90° on the horizontal axis represents the d-axis (i.e., the magnetic pole center) and 0° and 180° on the horizontal axis represent the q-axis.

Accordingly, with the configuration of the magnets 91 and 92 according to the present embodiment, the magnet magnetic flux on the d-axis is intensified and the magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q-axis is suppressed. Consequently, it becomes possible to suitably realize the magnets 91 and 92 where the surface magnetic flux gradually changes from the q-axis to the d-axis in each magnetic pole.

The sine wave matching percentage of the magnetic flux density distribution may be, for example, 40% or higher. In this case, it is possible to reliably increase the amount of magnetic flux at the central portion of the waveform in comparison with the case of employing radial-oriented magnets and the case of employing parallel-oriented magnets. In the case of employing radial-oriented magnets, the sine wave matching percentage is about 30%. Moreover, setting the sine wave matching percentage to be higher than or equal to 60%, it is possible to reliably increase the amount of magnetic flux at the central portion of the waveform in comparison with the case of employing magnets arranged in a magnetic flux concentration array such as a Halbach array.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the comparative example where radial anisotropic magnets are employed, the magnetic flux density changes sharply in the vicinity of the q-axis. The sharp change in the magnetic flux density causes the amount of eddy current generated in the stator coil 51 to increase. Moreover, the magnetic flux on the stator coil 51 side also changes sharply. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the waveform of the magnetic flux density distribution is approximate to a sine wave. Consequently, the change in the magnetic flux density in the vicinity of the q-axis is gentler than in the comparative example where radial anisotropic magnets are employed. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress generation of eddy current.

In the magnet unit 42, in each of the magnets 91 and 92, in the vicinity of the d-axis (i.e., the magnetic pole center), magnetic flux is generated in a direction perpendicular to the magnetic flux acting surface 280 on the stator 50 side. The generated magnetic flux flows along the arc-shaped magnetic paths that extend away from the d-axis as they extend away from the magnetic flux acting surface 280 on the stator 50 side. Moreover, the closer the direction of the magnetic flux is to a direction perpendicular to the magnetic flux acting surface 280 on the stator 50 side, the stronger the magnetic flux is. In this regard, in the rotating electric machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the radial thickness of the electrical conductor groups 81 is reduced as described previously. Consequently, the radial center position of the electrical conductor groups 81 becomes closer to the magnetic flux acting surfaces of the magnet unit 42, thereby allowing the stator 50 to receive the stronger magnet magnetic flux from the rotor 40.

Furthermore, the stator 50 has the hollow cylindrical stator core 52 arranged on the radially inner side of the stator coil 51, i.e., on the opposite side of the stator coil 51 to the rotor 40. Therefore, the magnetic flux flowing out from the magnetic flux acting surfaces of the magnets 91 and 92 is attracted by the stator core 52 to circulate through the stator core 52 that constitutes part of the magnetic circuit. Consequently, it becomes possible to optimize the direction and paths of the magnet magnetic flux.

Next, a method of manufacturing the rotating electric machine 10, more particularly a process of assembling the bearing unit 20, the housing 30, the rotor 40, the stator 50 and the inverter unit 60 will be described with reference to FIG. 5. In addition, the inverter 60 includes the unit base 61 and the electrical components 62 as shown in FIG. 6. Therefore, the assembling process includes a step of assembling the unit base 61 and the electrical components 62. In the following explanation, the assembly of the stator 50 and the inverter unit 60 will be referred to as the first unit while the assembly of the bearing unit 20, the housing 30 and the rotor 40 will be referred to as the second unit.

The manufacturing method according to the present embodiment includes:

a first step of mounting the electrical components 62 to the radially inner periphery of the unit base 61;

a second step of mounting the unit base 61 to the radially inner periphery of the stator 50, thereby forming the first unit;

a third step of inserting the attaching portion 44 of the rotor 40 into the bearing unit 20 that has been assembled to the housing 30, thereby forming the second unit;

a fourth step of mounting the first unit to the radially inner periphery of the second unit; and

a fifth step of fastening the housing 30 and the unit base 61 to each other, wherein these steps are performed in the sequence of the first step→the second step→the third step→the fourth step→the fifth step.

With the above manufacturing method, the bearing unit 20, the housing 30, the rotor 40, the stator 50 and the inverter unit 60 are first assembled into a plurality of subassemblies and then the subassemblies are further assembled together to form the rotating electric machine 10. Consequently, it becomes possible to realize ease of handling and complete inspection for each unit, thereby making it possible build a suitable assembly line. As a result, it becomes possible to easily cope with multi-product production.

In the first step, a heat conducting member with high heat conductivity may be attached, for example by coating or bonding, to the radially inner periphery of the unit base 61 or the radially outer periphery of the electrical components 62. Then, the electrical components 62 may be mounted to the unit base 61 so that the heat conducting member is interposed between the radially inner periphery of the unit base 61 and the radially outer periphery of the electrical components 62. Consequently, with the heat conducting member, it is possible to more effectively transfer heat generated in the semiconductor modules 66 to the unit base 61.

In the third step, the insertion of the rotor 40 may be performed keeping coaxiality between the housing 30 and the rotor 40. Specifically, a jig may be used to position the outer circumferential surface of the rotor 40 (i.e., the outer circumferential surface of the magnet holder 41) or the inner circumferential surface of the rotor 40 (or the inner circumferential surface of the magnet unit 42) with respect to, for example, the inner circumferential surface of the housing 30. Then, the assembling of the housing 30 and the rotor 40 may be performed with either of the housing 30 and the rotor 40 sliding along the jig. Consequently, it is possible to assemble the heavy-weight components without imposing unbalanced load on the bearing unit 20. As a result, it is possible to ensure reliability of the bearing unit 20.

In the fourth step, the assembling of the first and second units may be performed keeping coaxiality between them. Specifically, a jig may be used to position the inner circumferential surface of the unit base 61 with respect to the inner circumferential surface of the attaching portion 44 of the rotor 40. Then, the assembling of the first and second units may be performed with either of them sliding along the jig. Consequently, it is possible to perform the assembling of the first and second units without causing interference between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 that are arranged with the minute air gap formed therebetween. As a result, it is possible to prevent defects, such as damage to the stator coil 51 or to the permanent magnets, from occurring during the assembling of the first and second units.

Alternatively, the above steps may be performed in the sequence of the second step→the third step→the fourth step→the fifth step→the first step. In this case, the delicate electrical components 62 are assembled to the other components of the rotating electric machine 10 in the final step. Consequently, it is possible to minimize stress induced in the electrical components 62 during the assembly process.

Next, the configuration of a control system for controlling the rotating electric machine 10 will be described. FIG. 19 is an electric circuit diagram of the control system of the rotating electric machine 10. FIG. 20 is a functional block diagram illustrating a current feedback control process performed by a controller 110 of the control system.

As shown in FIG. 19, the stator coil 51 is comprised of a pair of three-phase coils 51 a and 51 b. Moreover, the three-phase coil 51 a is comprised of the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase windings and the three-phase coil 51 b is comprised of the X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase windings. In the control system, there are provided, as electric power converters, a first inverter 101 and a second inverter 102 respectively for the three-phase coils 51 a and 51 b. In each of the inverters 101 and 102, there is formed a full bridge circuit having a plurality of pairs of upper and lower arms. The number of pairs of the upper and lower arms in each of the inverters 101 and 102 is equal to the number of the phase windings of each of the three-phase coils 51 a and 51 b. Each of the upper and lower arms has a switch (or semiconductor switching element) provided therein. Electric current supplied to each phase winding of the stator coil 51 is regulated by turning on/off the switch of each of the upper and lower arms.

A DC power supply 103 and a smoothing capacitor 104 are connected in parallel to each of the inverters 101 and 102. The DC power supply 103 is implemented by, for example, an assembled battery that is obtained by connecting a plurality of battery cells in series with each other. In addition, each of the switches of the inverters 101 and 102 corresponds to one of the semiconductor modules 66 shown in FIG. 1. The smoothing capacitor 104 corresponds to the capacitor module 68 shown in FIG. 1.

The controller 110 includes a microcomputer which is configured with a CPU and various memories. Based on various types of detected information on the rotating electric machine 10 and power running drive and electric power generation requests, the controller 110 performs energization control by turning on and off the switches of the inverters 101 and 102. The controller 110 corresponds to the controller 77 shown in FIG. 6. The detected information on the rotating electric machine 10 includes, for example, a rotation angle (or electrical angle information) of the rotor 40 detected by an angle detector such as a resolver, a power supply voltage (or inverter input voltage) detected by a voltage sensor, and phase currents detected by respective current sensors. The controller 110 generates and outputs operation signals for operating the switches of the inverters 101 and 102. In addition, in the case of the rotating electric machine 10 being used as a vehicular power source, the power generation request may be a regenerative drive request.

The first inverter 101 includes, for each of the U, V and W phases, one serially-connected unit consisting of an upper-arm switch Sp and a lower-arm switch Sn. A high potential-side terminal of the upper-arm switch Sp is connected to a positive terminal of the DC power supply 103. A low potential-side terminal of the lower-arm switch Sn is connected to a negative terminal of the DC power supply 103 (or ground). To an intermediate junction point between the upper-arm switch Sp and the lower-arm switch Sn, there is connected a first end of a corresponding one of the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase windings. The U-phase, V-phase and W-phase windings are star-connected (or Y-connected) to define a neutral point therebetween, at which second ends of these phase windings are connected with each other.

The second inverter 102 has a similar configuration to the first inverter 101. Specifically, the second inverter 102 includes, for each of the X, Y and Z phases, one serially-connected unit consisting of an upper-arm switch Sp and a lower-arm switch Sn. A high potential-side terminal of the upper-arm switch Sp is connected to the positive terminal of the DC power supply 103. A low potential-side terminal of the lower-arm switch Sn is connected to the negative terminal of the DC power supply 103 (or ground). To an intermediate junction point between the upper-arm switch Sp and the lower-arm switch Sn, there is connected a first end of a corresponding one of the X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase windings. The X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase windings are star-connected (or Y-connected) to define a neutral point therebetween, at which second ends of these phase windings are connected with each other.

FIG. 20 shows both the current feedback control process for controlling the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase currents and the current feedback control process for controlling the X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase currents. First, the current feedback control process for the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase currents will be described.

In FIG. 20, a current command value setter 111 is configured to set, using a torque-dq map, both a d-axis current command value and a q-axis current command value on the basis of a power running torque command value or an electric power generation torque command value to the rotating electric machine 10 and an electrical angular speed co obtained by differentiating the electrical angle θ with respect to time. In addition, the current command value setter 111 is provided for both control of the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase currents and control of the X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase currents. In the case of the rotating electric machine 10 being used as a vehicular power source, the electric power generation torque command value is a regenerative torque command value.

A dq converter 112 is configured to convert current detected values (three phase currents), which are detected by the current sensors provided for respective phases, into d-axis current and q-axis current which are current components in a Cartesian two-dimensional rotating coordinate system whose d-axis indicates a field direction (or direction of an axis of a magnetic field).

A d-axis current feedback controller 113 is configured to calculate a d-axis command voltage as a manipulated variable for feedback-controlling the d-axis current to the d-axis current command value. A q-axis current feedback controller 114 is configured to calculate a q-axis command voltage as a manipulated variable for feedback-controlling the q-axis current to the q-axis current command value. These feedback controllers 113 and 114 are configured to calculate, using a PI feedback method, the command voltages on the basis of the differences of the d-axis current and the q-axis current from the respective current command values.

A three-phase converter 115 is configured to convert the d-axis and q-axis command voltages into U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages. In addition, the above units 111-115 together correspond to a feedback controller for performing feedback control of fundamental currents by a dq conversion method. The U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages are the feedback-controlled values.

An operation signal generator 116 is configured to generate, using a well-known triangular-wave carrier comparison method, the operation signals for the first inverter 101 on the basis of the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages. Specifically, the operation signal generator 116 generates the operation signals (or duty signals) for operating the upper-arm and lower-arm switches Sp and Sn of the U, V and W phases by PWM control based on comparison in amplitude between signals, which are obtained by normalizing the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages with respect to the power supply voltage, and a carrier signal such as a triangular-wave signal.

For the X, Y and W phases, there is provided a configuration similar to the above-described configuration provided for the U, V and W phases. Specifically, a dq converter 122 is configured to convert current detected values (three phase currents), which are detected by the current sensors provided for respective phases, into d-axis current and q-axis current which are current components in the Cartesian two-dimensional rotating coordinate system whose d-axis indicates the field direction.

A d-axis current feedback controller 123 is configured to calculate a d-axis command voltage. A q-axis current feedback controller 124 is configured to calculate a q-axis command voltage. A three-phase converter 125 is configured to convert the d-axis and q-axis command voltages into X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase command voltages. An operation signal generator 126 is configured to generate the operation signals for the second inverter 102 on the basis of the X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase command voltages. Specifically, the operation signal generator 126 generates the operation signals (or duty signals) for operating the upper-arm and lower-arm switches Sp and Sn of the X, Y and Z phases by PWM control based on comparison in amplitude between signals, which are obtained by normalizing the X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase command voltages with respect to the power supply voltage, and a carrier signal such as a triangular-wave signal.

A driver 117 is configured to turn on and off the switches Sp and Sn of the inverters 101 and 102 based on the switch operation signals generated by the operation signal generators 116 and 126.

Next, a torque feedback control process will be described. This process is performed mainly for reducing losses and thereby increasing the output of the rotating electric machine 10 in operating conditions where the output voltages of the inverters 101 and 102 become high, such as in a high-rotation region and a high-output region. The controller 110 selectively performs either one of the torque feedback control process and the current feedback control process according to the operating condition of the rotating electric machine 10.

FIG. 21 shows both the torque feedback control process corresponding to the U, V and W phases and the torque feedback control process corresponding to the X, Y and Z phases. In addition, in FIG. 21, functional blocks identical to those in FIG. 20 are designated by the same reference numerals as in FIG. 20 and descriptions of them will be omitted hereinafter. First, the torque feedback control process for the U, V and W phases will be described.

A voltage amplitude calculator 127 is configured to calculate a voltage amplitude command, which indicates a command value of the amplitudes of voltage vectors, on the basis of the power running torque command value or the electric power generation torque command value to the rotating electric machine 10 and the electrical angular speed co obtained by differentiating the electrical angle θ with respect to time.

A torque estimator 128 a is configured to calculate a torque estimated value corresponding to the U, V and W phases on the basis of the d-axis current and q-axis current obtained by the dq converter 112. In addition, the torque estimator 128 a may calculate the voltage amplitude command on the basis of map information associating the d-axis and q-axis currents with the voltage amplitude command.

A torque feedback controller 129 a is configured to calculate a voltage phase command, which indicates command values of the phases of the voltage vectors, as a manipulated variable for feedback-controlling the torque estimated value to the power running torque command value or the electric power generation torque command value. More specifically, the torque feedback controller 129 a calculates, using a PI feedback method, the voltage phase command on the basis of the difference of the torque estimated value from the power running torque command value or the electric power generation torque command value.

An operation signal generator 130 a is configured to generate the operation signals for the first inverter 101 on the basis of the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command and the electrical angle θ. Specifically, the operation signal generator 130 a first calculates U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages on the basis of the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command and the electrical angle θ. Then, the operation signal generator 130 a generates the operation signals for operating the upper-arm and lower-arm switches Sp and Sn of the U, V and W phases by PWM control based on comparison in amplitude between signals, which are obtained by normalizing the calculated U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages with respect to the power supply voltage, and a carrier signal such as a triangular-wave signal.

In addition, as an alternative, the operation signal generator 130 a may generate the switch operation signals on the basis of pulse pattern information, the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command and the electrical angle θ. The pulse pattern information is map information associating the switch operation signals with the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command and the electrical angle θ.

For the X, Y and W phases, there is provided a configuration similar to the above-described configuration provided for the U, V and W phases. Specifically, a torque estimator 128 b is configured to calculate a torque estimated value corresponding to the X, Y and Z phases on the basis of the d-axis current and q-axis current obtained by the dq converter 122.

A torque feedback controller 129 b is configured to calculate a voltage phase command as a manipulated variable for feedback-controlling the torque estimated value to the power running torque command value or the electric power generation torque command value. More specifically, the torque feedback controller 129 b calculates, using a PI feedback method, the voltage phase command on the basis of the difference of the torque estimated value from the power running torque command value or the electric power generation torque command value.

An operation signal generator 130 b is configured to generate the operation signals for the second inverter 102 on the basis of the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command and the electrical angle θ. Specifically, the operation signal generator 130 b first calculates X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase command voltages on the basis of the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command and the electrical angle θ. Then, the operation signal generator 130 b generates the operation signals for operating the upper-arm and lower-arm switches Sp and Sn of the X, Y and Z phases by PWM control based on comparison in amplitude between signals, which are obtained by normalizing the calculated X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase command voltages with respect to the power supply voltage, and a carrier signal such as a triangular-wave signal. The driver 117 is configured to turn on and off the switches Sp and Sn of the inverters 101 and 102 based on the switch operation signals generated by the operation signal generators 130 a and 130 b.

In addition, as an alternative, the operation signal generator 130 b may generate the switch operation signals on the basis of pulse pattern information, the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command and the electrical angle θ. The pulse pattern information is map information associating the switch operation signals with the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command and the electrical angle θ.

In the rotating electric machine 10, galvanic corrosion may occur in the bearings 21 and 22 due to generation of shaft current. For example, when energization of the stator coil 51 is switched by the switching operation, magnetic flux distortion may occur due to a slight switching-timing deviation (or unbalanced switching), causing galvanic corrosion to occur in the bearings 21 and 22 that support the rotating shaft 11. More specifically, the magnetic flux distortion, which occurs depending on the inductance of the stator 50, induces an axial electromotive force. Due to the axial electromotive force, electrical breakdown may occur in the bearings 21 and 22, allowing galvanic corrosion to progress therein.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, three galvanic corrosion countermeasures are taken which will be described hereinafter. As the first galvanic corrosion countermeasure, the inductance of the stator 50 is lowered with employment of the core-less structure and the magnet unit 42 is configured to make change in the magnet magnetic flux gentle. As the second galvanic corrosion countermeasure, the rotating shaft 11 is supported in a cantilever fashion by the bearings 21 and 22. As the third galvanic corrosion countermeasure, the annular stator coil 51 is molded, together with the stator core 52, in a molding material. Hereinafter, each of the three galvanic corrosion countermeasures will be described in more detail.

First, as the first galvanic corrosion countermeasure, the toothless structure is employed for the stator 50 so that no teeth are interposed between the circumferentially adjacent electrical conductor groups 81. Instead, the sealing member 57, which is formed of a nonmagnetic material, is interposed between the electrical conductor groups 81 (see FIG. 10). Consequently, it becomes possible to lower the inductance of the stator 50. Further, with reduction in the inductance of the stator 50, even if a switching-timing deviation occurs during energization of the stator coil 51, it is possible to suppress occurrence of magnetic flux distortion due to the switching-timing deviation. As a result, it is possible to suppress occurrence of galvanic corrosion in the bearings 21 and 22. In addition, the d-axis inductance is preferably lower than the q-axis inductance.

Moreover, each of the magnets 91 and 92 is configured to have the easy axis of magnetization oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is more parallel to the d-axis on the d-axis side than on the q-axis side (see FIG. 9). Consequently, the magnet magnetic flux on the d-axis is intensified and the surface magnetic flux change (i.e., increase or decrease in the magnetic flux) from the q-axis to the d-axis becomes gentle in each magnetic pole. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress occurrence of sharp voltage change due to unbalanced switching, thereby contributing to suppression of galvanic corrosion.

As the second galvanic corrosion countermeasure, in the rotating electric machine 10, both the bearings 21 and 22 are arranged on one axial side of the axial center position of the rotor 40 (see FIG. 2). With this arrangement, it is possible to reduce the influence of galvanic corrosion in comparison with the case of bearings being arranged respectively on opposite axial sides of a rotor. More specifically, in the case of supporting a rotor by bearings arranged respectively on opposite axial sides of the rotor, with generation of high-frequency magnetic flux, a closed circuit may be formed which extends through the rotor, the stator and the bearings (i.e., the bearings arranged respectively on opposite axial sides of the rotor), causing galvanic corrosion to occur in the bearings due to shaft current. In contrast, in the present embodiment, with the rotor 40 supported in a cantilever fashion by the bearings 21 and 22, no closed circuit is formed in the rotating electric machine 10; consequently, occurrence of galvanic corrosion due to shaft current is suppressed.

Moreover, the rotating electric machine 10 has the following configuration for arranging both the bearings 21 and 22 on one axial side of the axial center position of the rotor 40. That is, in the intermediate portion 45 of the magnet holder 41 which radially projects, there is formed a contact prevention portion that extends in the axial direction to prevent contact with the stator 50 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, even if a closed circuit of shaft current is formed through the magnet holder 41, it is possible to increase the length of the closed circuit and thus the circuit resistance. Consequently, it is possible to more reliably suppress occurrence of galvanic corrosion in the bearings 21 and 22.

Furthermore, on one axial side of the rotor 40, the holding member 23 of the bearing unit 20 is fixed to the housing 30; on the other axial side of the rotor 40, the housing 30 and the unit base 61 (i.e., stator holder) are joined to each other (see FIG. 2). With this configuration, it becomes possible to suitably arrange both the bearings 21 and 22 on one side of the rotor 40 in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 11. Moreover, with this configuration, the unit base 61 is connected with the rotating shaft 11 via the housing 30. Consequently, it becomes possible to arrange the unit base 61 at a position electrically separated from the rotating shaft 11. In addition, interposing an insulating member, such as a resin member, between the unit base 61 and the housing 30, the unit base 61 and the rotating shaft 11 are further electrically separated from each other. Consequently, it is possible to more reliably suppress occurrence of galvanic corrosion in the bearings 21 and 22.

In the rotating electric machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the shaft voltage applied to the bearings 21 and 22 is lowered by the one-side arrangement of the bearings 21 and 22. Moreover, the electric potential difference between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 is reduced. Consequently, it becomes possible to reduce the electric potential difference acting on the bearings 21 and 22 without using electrically conductive grease in the bearings 21 and 22. In general, electrically conductive grease contains fine particles such as carbon, and thus may cause acoustic noise to occur. In this regard, in the present embodiment, non-electrically conductive grease is used in the bearings 21 and 22. Consequently, it becomes possible to suppress generation of acoustic noise in the bearings 21 and 22. In the case of the rotating electric machine 10 being used in, for example, an electrically-driven vehicle such as an electric vehicle, it is necessary to take countermeasures against acoustic noise. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to take suitable countermeasures against acoustic noise.

As the third galvanic corrosion countermeasure, the stator coil 51 is molded, together with the stator core 52, by a molding material, thereby suppressing displacement of the stator coil 51 in the stator 50 (see FIG. 11). In particular, in the rotating electric machine 10 according to the present embodiment, no inter-conductor members (i.e., no teeth) are interposed between the circumferentially adjacent electrical conductor groups 81 of the stator coil 51. Therefore, displacement of the stator coil 51 may occur. In this regard, molding the stator coil 51 together with the stator core 52, it becomes possible to suppress displacement of the electrical conductors forming the stator coil 51. Consequently, it becomes possible to suppress magnetic flux distortion due to displacement of the stator coil 51; thus it also becomes possible to suppress occurrence of galvanic corrosion in the bearings 21 and 22 due to magnetic flux distortion.

Moreover, the unit base 61, which serves as a housing member to fix the stator core 52, is formed of carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP). Consequently, it becomes possible to suppress electric discharge to the unit base 61 in comparison with the case of the unit base 61 being formed of aluminum or the like. As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress occurrence of galvanic corrosion in the bearings 21 and 22.

In addition, as a further countermeasure for galvanic corrosion of the bearings 21 and 22, at least one of the outer and inner rings 25 and 26 of each of the bearings 21 and 22 may be formed of a ceramic material or an insulating sleeve may be provided outside the outer ring 25.

Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described focusing on the differences thereof from the first embodiment.

Second Embodiment

In the present embodiment, the polar anisotropic structure of the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 is modified in comparison with that described in the first embodiment. The polar anisotropic structure according to the present embodiment will be described in detail hereinafter.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the present embodiment, the magnet unit 42 is configured with a magnet array called a Halbach array. Specifically, the magnet unit 42 includes first magnets 131 each having its magnetization direction (or the direction of the magnetization vector thereof) coincident with a radial direction and second magnets 132 each having its magnetization direction (or the direction of the magnetization vector thereof) coincident with the circumferential direction. The first magnets 131 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. Each of the second magnets 132 is arranged between one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the first magnets 131. In addition, the first and second magnets 131 and 132 are permanent magnets constituted of rare-earth magnets such as neodymium magnets.

The first magnets 131 are arranged apart from one another in the circumferential direction so that on the side facing the stator 50 (i.e., the radially inner side), the polarities of the first magnets 131 alternate between N and S in the circumferential direction. Moreover, the second magnets 132 are arranged adjacent to the first magnets 131 in the circumferential direction so that the polarities of the second magnets 132 alternate in the circumferential direction. The cylindrical portion 43 is provided to surround the magnets 131 and 132. The cylindrical portion 43, which functions as a back core, may be formed of a soft-magnetic material. In the second embodiment, the relationship of the easy axes of magnetization of the magnet unit 42 to the d-axis and the q-axis on the d-q coordinate system is the same as in the first embodiment.

Moreover, magnetic members 133, each of which is formed a soft-magnetic material, are arranged on the radially outer side of the respective first magnets 131, i.e., on the side of the respective first magnets 131 facing the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41. More specifically, the magnetic members 133 may be formed, for example, of a magnetic steel sheet, soft iron or green compact core material. The circumferential length of the magnetic members 133 is set to be equal to the circumferential length of the first magnets 131 (more specifically, the circumferential length of outer peripheral portions of the first magnets 131). In a state of each pair of the first magnets 131 and the magnetic members 133 being integrated into one piece, the radial thickness of the integrated piece is equal to the radial thickness of the second magnets 132. In other words, the radial thickness of the first magnets 131 is smaller than the radial thickness of the second magnets 132 by the radial thickness of the magnetic members 133. The first magnets 131, the second magnets 132 and the magnetic members 133 are fixed to one another by, for example, an adhesive. In the magnet unit 42, the radially outer side of the first magnets 131 is the opposite side to the stator 50. The magnetic members 133 are arranged on the opposite side of the first magnets 131 to the stator 50 (i.e., on the non-stator side of the first magnets 131).

On an outer peripheral portion of each of the magnetic members 133, there is formed a key 134 as a protrusion protruding radially outward, i.e., protruding toward the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41. Moreover, in the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43, there are formed keyways 135 as recesses for respectively receiving the keys 134 of the magnetic members 133. The protruding shape of the keys 134 conforms to the recessed shape of the keyways 135. The number of the keys 134 formed in the magnetic members 133 is equal to the number of the keyways 135 formed in the cylindrical portion 43. With engagement between the keys 134 and the keyways 135, the displacement of the first and second magnets 131 and 132 relative to the magnet holder 41 in the circumferential direction (or rotational direction) is suppressed. In addition, keys 134 and keyways 135 (i.e., protrusions and recesses) may be arbitrarily formed in the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41 and the magnetic members 133. For example, as an alternative, each of the magnetic members 133 may have a keyway 135 formed in the outer peripheral portion thereof; on the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43, there may be formed keys 134 to be respectively received in the keyways 135 of the magnetic members 133.

In the magnet unit 42 according to the present embodiment, with the alternate arrangement of the first magnets 131 and the second magnets 132, it becomes possible to increase the magnetic flux density in the first magnets 131. Consequently, it becomes possible to cause one-side concentration of magnetic flux to occur in the magnetic unit 42, thereby intensifying magnetic flux on the side closer to the stator 50.

Moreover, with the magnetic members 133 arranged on the radially outer side, i.e., on the non-stator side of the first magnets 131, it becomes possible to suppress local magnetic saturation on the radially outer side of the first magnets 131; thus it becomes possible to suppress demagnetization of the first magnets 131 due to magnetic saturation. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the magnetic force of the magnet unit 42. That is, the magnet unit 42 according to the present embodiment can be regarded as being formed by replacing those portions of the first magnets 131 where it is easy for demagnetization to occur with the magnetic members 133.

FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b) illustrate flows of magnetic flux respectively in different magnet units 42. Specifically, FIG. 24(a) illustrates the flow of magnetic flux in a magnet unit 42 that has a conventional configuration without magnetic members 133. FIG. 24(b) illustrates the flow of magnetic flux in the magnet unit 42 according to the present embodiment which is configured to have the magnetic members 133. In addition, in FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b), both the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41 and the magnet unit 42 are developed to be straight in shape; the lower side corresponds to the stator side whereas the upper side corresponds to the non-stator side.

With the configuration shown in FIG. 24(a), the magnetic flux acting surfaces of the first magnets 131 and side surfaces of the second magnets 132 are arranged in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43. Moreover, the magnetic flux acting surfaces of the second magnets 132 are arranged in contact with corresponding side surfaces of the first magnets 131. With the above arrangement, in the cylindrical portion 43, there is generated a resultant magnetic flux of magnetic flux F1, which flows through a magnetic path on the radially outer side of the second magnets 132 to enter the magnetic flux acting surfaces of the first magnets 131, and magnetic flux that flows substantially parallel to the cylindrical portion 43 and attracts magnetic flux F2 of the second magnets 132. Consequently, in the cylindrical portion 43, local magnetic saturation may occur in the vicinities of the contact surfaces between the first magnets 131 and the second magnets 132.

In contrast, with the configuration shown in FIG. 24(b), on the opposite side of the first magnets 131 to the stator 50, there are provided the magnetic members 133 between the magnetic flux acting surfaces of the first magnets 131 and the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43, allowing magnetic flux to flow through the magnetic members 133. Consequently, it becomes possible to suppress occurrence of magnetic saturation in the cylindrical portion 43, thereby improving the resistance of the magnet unit 42 to demagnetization.

Moreover, with the configuration shown in FIG. 24(b), it is possible to eliminate, unlike in FIG. 24(a), the magnetic flux F2 which facilitates magnetic saturation. Consequently, it is possible to effectively improve the permeance of the entire magnetic circuit. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the magnetic circuit characteristics even in a severe high-temperature condition.

In the present embodiment, the magnet magnetic paths through the inside of the magnets are lengthened in comparison with radial magnets in a conventional SPM rotor. Consequently, the magnet permanence is increased, thereby making it possible to increase the magnetic force and thus the torque. Moreover, the magnetic flux is concentrated on the center of the d-axis, thereby making it possible to increase the sine wave matching percentage. In particular, setting the electric current waveform, by PWM control, to be a sine wave or a trapezoidal wave or using 120° excitation switching ICs, it is possible to more effectively increase the torque.

In addition, in the case of the stator core 52 being formed of magnetic steel sheets, the radial thickness of the stator core 52 may be set to be larger than or equal to ½ of the radial thickness of the magnet unit 42. For example, the radial thickness of the stator core 52 may be set to be larger than or equal to ½ of the radial thickness of the first magnets 131 arranged on the magnetic pole centers in the magnet unit 42. Moreover, the radial thickness of the stator core 52 may be set to be smaller than the radial thickness of the magnet unit 42. In this case, since the magnet magnetic flux is about 1[T] and the saturation flux density of the stator core 52 is equal to 2[T], setting the radial thickness of the stator core 52 to be larger than or equal to ½ of the radial thickness of the magnet unit 42, it is possible to prevent magnetic flux leakage to the inner peripheral side of the stator core 52.

In magnets with a Halbach structure or a polar anisotropic structure, the magnetic paths are quasi-arc-shaped; therefore it is possible to increase magnetic flux in proportion to the thickness of those magnets which handle the circumferential magnetic flux. With such a configuration, it is considered that the magnetic flux flowing to the stator core 52 does not exceed the circumferential magnetic flux. That is, in the case of using an iron-based metal whose saturation flux density is 2[T] with respect to the magnet magnetic flux being 1[T], setting the thickness of the stator core 52 to be larger than or equal to half the thickness of the magnets, it is possible to suitably reduce both the size and weight of the rotating electric machine without causing magnetic saturation of the stator core 52. On the other hand, the magnet magnetic flux is generally lower than or equal to 0.9[T] since a demagnetizing field from the stator 50 acts on the magnet magnetic flux. Therefore, setting the thickness of the stator core to be larger than or equal to half the thickness of the magnets, it is possible to suitably keep the permeability high.

Hereinafter, modifications will be described where the above-described configurations are partially modified.

(First Modification)

In the above-described embodiments, the outer circumferential surface of the stator core 52 is configured as a smooth curved surface; on the outer circumferential surface of the stator core 52, the electrical conductor groups 81 are arranged at predetermined intervals. As an alternative, as shown in FIG. 25, the stator core 52 may include an annular yoke 141, which is located on the radially opposite side of the stator coil 51 to the rotor 40 (i.e., on the lower side of the stator coil 51 in the figure), and protrusions 142 each of which protrudes from the yoke 141 so as to be located between one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the straight portions 83. That is, the protrusions 142 are formed at predetermined intervals on the radially outer side, i.e., on the rotor 40 side of the yoke 141. The electrical conductor groups 81 forming the stator coil 51 engage with the protrusions 142 in the circumferential direction. That is, the protrusions 142 serve as positioning members for circumferential positioning the electrical conductor groups 81. In addition, the protrusions 142 also correspond to “inter-conductor members”.

As shown in FIG. 25, the radial thickness of the protrusions 142 from the yoke 141, i.e., the distance W from inner side surfaces 320 of the straight portions 83, which adjoin the yoke 141, to the tops of the protrusions 142 in the radial direction of the yoke 141 is set to be smaller than ½ of the radial thickness of those of the straight portions 83 radially stacked in layers which radially adjoin the yoke 141 (i.e., smaller than H1 in the figure). In other words, the radial range corresponding to ¾ of T1 may be occupied by the nonmagnetic member (i.e., sealing member 57), where T1 is the dimension (or thickness) of the electrical conductor groups 81 (i.e., the conductive members) in the radial direction of the stator coil 51 (or the stator core 52) (twice the thickness of each of the electrical conductors 82, in other words, the minimum distance from the surfaces 320 of the electrical conductor groups 81 adjoining the stator core 52 to the surfaces 330 of the electrical conductor groups 81 facing the rotor 40). Limiting the thickness of the protrusions 142 as above, it becomes possible to prevent the protrusions 142 from functioning as teeth between the circumferentially-adjacent electrical conductor groups 81 (more specifically, the straight portions 83) and thus prevent magnetic paths from being formed by teeth. In addition, the protrusions 142 are not necessarily provided in all of the gaps formed between the circumferentially-adjacent electrical conductor groups 81. For example, as an alternative, there may be provided only one protrusion 142 which is located in the gap formed between one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor groups 81. As another alternative, there may be provided a plurality of protrusions 142 which are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be respectively received in every predetermined number of the gaps formed between the circumferentially-adjacent electrical conductor groups 81. The shape of the protrusions 142 may be an arbitrary shape such as a rectangular or arc-like shape.

Moreover, on the outer circumferential surface of the stator core 52, the straight portions 83 may alternatively be provided in a single layer. Accordingly, in a broad sense, the radial thickness of the protrusions 142 from the yoke 141 may be set to be smaller than ½ of the radial thickness of each of the straight portions 83.

In addition, the protrusions 142 may be shaped so as to protrude from the yoke 141 within the range of an imaginary circle which centers on the axis of the rotating shaft 11 and extends through the radial center position of each of the straight portions 83 that radially adjoin the yoke 141. In other words, the protrusions 142 may be shaped so as not to protrude radially outside (i.e., to the rotor 40 side of) the imaginary circle.

With the above configuration, the radial thickness of the protrusions 142 is limited so that the protrusions 142 do not function as teeth between the circumferentially-adjacent straight portions 83. Consequently, it becomes possible to arrange the circumferentially-adjacent straight portions 83 closer to one another than in the case of providing teeth between the circumferentially-adjacent straight portions 83. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the cross-sectional area of each conductor body 82 a, thereby reducing the amount of heat generated with energization of the stator coil 51. Moreover, since no teeth are provided in the stator 50, it is possible to prevent occurrence of magnetic saturation in the stator core 52, thereby making it possible to increase the energization current of the stator coil 51. In this case, however, it is possible to suitably cope with the problem that the amount of heat generated with energization of the stator coil 51 increases with the energization current. In addition, in the stator coil 51, each of the turn portions 84 has part thereof radially offset to form an interference prevention part. With the interference prevention parts of the turn portions 84, it becomes possible to arrange the turn portions 84 radially apart from each other. Consequently, it becomes possible to improve heat dissipation at the turn portions 84. As above, it becomes possible to improve heat dissipation in the stator 50.

In addition, in the case of the yoke 141 of the stator core 52 being located away from the magnet unit 42 (i.e., the magnets 91 and 92) of the rotor 40 by a predetermined distance or more, the radial thickness of the protrusions 142 is not subjected to H1 shown in FIG. 25. Specifically, when the yoke 141 is located away from the magnet unit 42 by 2 mm or more, the radial thickness of the protrusions 142 may be set to be larger than H1. For example, when the radial thickness of each of the straight portions 83 is larger than 2 mm and each of the electrical conductor groups 81 consists of two radially-stacked electrical conductors 82, the protrusions 142 may be provided within a range from the yoke 141 to the radial center position of the straight portion 83 not adjoining the yoke 141, i.e., to the radial center position of the second electrical conductor 82 counting from the yoke 141. In this case, setting the radial thickness of the protrusions 142 to be not larger than (H1×3/2), it is possible to achieve the above-described advantageous effects by increasing the conductor cross-sectional area in the electrical conductor groups 81.

Moreover, the stator core 52 may alternatively have a configuration as shown in FIG. 26. It should be noted that: the sealing resin 57 is omitted from FIG. 26; however, the sealing resin 57 may be included in the configuration shown in FIG. 26. In addition, in FIG. 26, for the sake of simplicity, both the magnet unit 42 and the stator core 52 are shown developed in a straight line.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 26, the stator 50 has, as the inter-conductor members, protrusions 142 each being formed between one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductors 82 (i.e., the straight sections 83). The stator 50 also has a circumferentially-extending portion 350 that magnetically functions together with one magnetic pole (N or S pole) of the magnet unit 42 when the stator coil 51 is energized. The portion 350 has a circumferential length Wn. The protrusions 142 are formed of a magnetic material satisfying the following relationship:

Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br  (1)

where Wt is the total width (i.e., the sum of circumferential widths) of the protrusions 142 present in the circumferential range of Wn, Bs is the saturation flux density of the protrusions 142, Wm is the circumferential width of the magnet unit 42 per magnetic pole and Br is the residual flux density of the magnet unit 42.

In addition, the circumferential range Wn is set to include a plurality of circumferentially-adjacent electrical conductor groups 81 whose energization periods overlap each other. The references (or boundaries) in setting the range Wn may be preferably set to the centers of the gaps 56 formed between the electrical conductor groups 81. For example, in the configuration shown in FIG. 26, the circumferential range Wn is set to include four electrical conductor groups 81 located closest to the magnetic pole center of an N pole in the circumferential direction. The ends (start and end points) of the range Wn are respectively set to the centers of two of all the gaps 56 formed between the electrical conductor groups 81.

Moreover, in the configuration shown in FIG. 26, at each end of the range Wn, half of one protrusion 142 is included in the range Wn. Therefore, it can be considered that in the range Wn, there are included a total of four protrusions 142. Accordingly, the total width Wt of the protrusions 142 included in the range Wn can be calculated as follows: Wt=½A+A+A+A+½A=4A, where A is the width of each of the protrusions 142 (i.e., the dimension of each of the protrusions 142 in the circumferential direction of the stator 50, in other words, the interval between each adjacent pair of the electrical conductor groups 81).

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the three-phase coils of the stator coil 51 are wound in a distributed winding manner. In the stator coil 51, the number of the protrusions 142, i.e., the number of the gaps 56 formed between the electrical conductor groups 81 per magnetic pole of the magnet unit 42 is set to (number of phases×Q), where Q is the number of those of the electrical conductors 82 of each phase which are in contact with the stator core 52. In the case of the electrical conductors 82 being stacked in the radial direction of the rotor 40 to form the electrical conductor groups 81, Q is equal to the number of those electrical conductors 82 of the electrical conductor groups 81 of each phase which are located on the inner peripheral side in the electrical conductor groups 81. In this case, when the phase windings of the three-phase coils of the stator coil 51 are energized in a predetermined sequence, in each magnetic pole, the protrusions 142 corresponding to two phases are excited. Accordingly, in the range of each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 42, the total circumferential width Wt of the protrusions 142 that are excited by energization of the stator coil 51 is equal to (number of excited phases×Q×A=2×2×A), where A is the circumferential width of each of the protrusions 142 (or the circumferential width of each of the gaps 56).

Moreover, upon specifying the total width Wt as above, in the stator core 52, the protrusions 142 are formed of a magnetic material satisfying the above relationship (1). In addition, the total width Wt is also equal to the circumferential width of that portion in each magnetic pole whose relative permeability may become higher than 1. Moreover, giving a margin, the total width Wt may be determined to be the circumferential width of the protrusions 142 in each magnetic pole. More specifically, since the number of the protrusions 142 per magnetic pole of the magnet unit 42 is equal to (number of phases×Q), the circumferential width (i.e., the total circumferential width Wt) of the protrusions 142 in each magnetic pole may be determined to be (number of phases×Q×A=3×2×A=6A).

In addition, the distributed winding manner is such that there is one pole pair of the stator coil 51 for each pole pair period of the magnetic poles (i.e., N and S poles). One pole pair of the stator coil 51 is constituted of two straight portions 83 where electric currents respectively flow in opposite directions and which are electrically connected with each other via one turn portion 84, and the one turn portion 84. Satisfying the above condition, a short pitch winding may be regarded as being equivalent to a full pitch winding wound in the distributed winding manner.

Next, examples of the stator coil 51 being wound in a concentrated winding manner will be illustrated. The concentrated winding manner is such that the width of each magnetic pole pair is different from the width of each pole pair of the stator coil 51. The examples include an example where three electrical conductor groups 81 are provided with respect to each magnetic pole pair, an example where three electrical conductor groups 81 are provided with respect to two magnetic pole pairs, nine electrical conductor groups 81 are provided with respect to four magnetic pole pairs, and an example where nine electrical conductor groups 81 are provided with respect to five magnetic pole pairs.

In the case of the stator coil 51 being wound in the concentrated winding manner, when the phase windings of the three-phase coils of the stator coil 51 are energized in a predetermined sequence, two of the phase windings are excited at the same time. Consequently, the protrusions 142 corresponding to the two exited phase windings are also excited. Accordingly, in the range of each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 42, the circumferential width Wt of the protrusions 142 that are excited by energization of the stator coil 51 is equal to (A×2). Moreover, upon specifying the width Wt as above, the protrusions 142 are formed of a magnetic material satisfying the above relationship (1). In addition, in the case of the stator coil 51 being wound in the concentrated winding manner, the parameter A is represented by the sum of circumferential widths of the protrusions 142 in a region surrounded by the electrical conductor groups 81 of the same phase. Moreover, the parameter Wm is represented by (the entire circumference of the surface of the magnet unit 42 facing the air gap)×(number of phases)±(distribution number of the electrical conductor groups 81).

In the case of magnets whose BH products are higher than or equal to 20[MGOe (KJ/m³)], such as neodymium magnets, samarium-cobalt magnets or ferrite magnets, Bd is higher than or equal to 1.0[T]. In the case of iron, Br is higher than or equal to 2.0[T]. Therefore, in the case of the rotating electric machine being configured as a high-output motor, in the stator core 52, the protrusions 142 may be formed of a magnetic material satisfying the relationship of Wt<½×Wm. Moreover, in the case of each of the electrical conductors 82 including an outer coat 182 as will be described later, the electrical conductors 82 may be arranged in the circumferential direction of the stator core 52 to have the outer coats 182 thereof in contact with one another. In this case, the parameter Wt may be considered to be equal to 0 or the sum of thicknesses of the outer coats 182 of two adjoining electrical conductors 82.

In the configurations shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the inter-conductor members (i.e., the protrusions 142) are disproportionately small with respect to the magnet magnetic flux on the rotor 40 side. In addition, the rotor 40 is configured as a low-inductance and flat SPM rotor; thus the rotor 40 has no saliency in terms of magnetic reluctance. With these configurations, it is possible to lower the inductance of the stator 50. Further, with reduction in the inductance of the stator 50, it is possible to suppress occurrence of magnetic flux distortion due to a switching-timing deviation in the stator coil 51. As a result, it is possible suppress occurrence of galvanic corrosion in the bearings 21 and 22.

(Second Modification)

The stator 50, which employs the inter-conductor members satisfying the above relationship (1), may alternatively have a configuration as shown in FIG. 27. In this configuration, tooth-shaped portions 143 are provided, as the inter-conductor members, on the outer circumferential surface (i.e., the upper surface in the figure) of the stator core 52. The tooth-shaped portions 143 each protrude from the yoke 141 and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. The tooth-shaped portions 143 have a radial thickness equal to the radial thickness of the electrical conductor groups 81. Side surfaces of the tooth-shaped portions 143 are arranged to abut the electrical conductors 82 of the electrical conductor groups 81. Alternatively, there may be formed gaps between the tooth-shaped portions 143 and the electrical conductors 82 in the circumferential direction.

The tooth-shaped portions 143 are limited in circumferential width. That is, there are provided pole teeth (i.e., stator teeth) that are disproportionately thin with respect to the volume of the magnets. With this configuration, the tooth-shaped portions 143 can be reliably saturated by a magnet magnetic flux of 1.8T or higher, thereby lowering the permeance and thus the inductance.

The magnetic flux on the magnet unit 42 side can be expressed as (Sm×Br), where Sm is the area of the stator-side magnetic flux acting surface per magnetic pole and Br is the residual flux density of the magnet unit 42. On the other hand, supposing that the tooth-shaped portions 143 corresponding to two phases are excited in each magnetic pole by energization of the stator coil 51, then the magnetic flux on the stator 50 side can be expressed as (St×m×2×Bs), where St is the area of the rotor-side surface of each tooth-shaped portion 143 and m is the number of the electrical conductors 82 per phase. In this case, the inductance can be lowered by limiting the dimensions of the tooth-shaped portions 143 so as to satisfy the following relationship:

St×m×2×Bs<Sm×Br  (2)

In addition, in the case of the tooth-shaped portions 143 having the same axial dimension as the magnet unit 42, the above relationship (2) can be replaced with the following relationship:

Wst×m×2×Bs≤Wm×Br  (3)

where Wm is the circumferential width of the magnet unit 42 per magnetic pole and Wst is the circumferential width of each tooth-shaped portion 143.

More specifically, supposing that Bs=2T, Br=1T and m=2, the above relationship (3) can be reduced to the relationship of (Wst<Wm/8). In this case, the inductance can be lowered by setting the circumferential width Wst of each tooth-shaped portion 143 to be smaller than ⅛ of the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 42 per magnetic pole. In addition, in the case of m being equal to 1, the circumferential width Wst of each tooth-shaped portion 143 may be set to be smaller than ¼ of the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 42 per magnetic pole.

In addition, in the above relationship (3), (Wst×m×2) corresponds to the total circumferential width of the tooth-shaped portions 143 that are excited by energization of the stator coil 51 in the range of each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 42.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 27, the inter-conductor members (i.e., the tooth-shaped portions 143) are disproportionately small with respect to the magnet magnetic flux on the rotor 40 side as in the configurations shown in FIGS. 25 and 26. Consequently, it is possible to lower the inductance of the stator 50. Further, with reduction in the inductance of the stator 50, it is possible to suppress occurrence of magnetic flux distortion due to a switching-timing deviation in the stator coil 51. As a result, it is possible suppress occurrence of galvanic corrosion in the bearings 21 and 22.

(Third Modification)

In the above-described embodiments, the sealing member 57 is provided, on the radially outer side of the stator core 52, in a region covering all the electrical conductor groups 81, i.e., in a region whose radial thickness is larger than the radial thickness of each electrical conductor group 81. As an alternative, as shown in FIG. 28, the sealing member 57 may be provided so that the electrical conductors 82 are partially exposed from the sealing member 57. More specifically, those of the electrical conductors 82 which are arranged radially outermost in the electrical conductor groups 81 are partially exposed, on the radially outer side, i.e., on the rotor 40 side, from the sealing member 57. In this case, the radial thickness of the sealing member 57 may be set to be equal to or smaller than the radial thickness of each electrical conductor group 81.

(Fourth Modification)

As shown in FIG. 29, in the stator core 50, the electrical conductor groups 81 may not be sealed by any sealing member 57. That is, the stator core 50 may have no sealing member 57 employed therein to cover the stator coil 51. In this case, the gaps between the circumferentially-aligned electrical conductor groups 81 are not occupied by any inter-conductor members, remaining void. In other words, no inter-conductor members are provided between the circumferentially-aligned electrical conductor groups 81. In addition, air, which can be regarded as a nonmagnetic material or an equivalent of a nonmagnetic material satisfying Bs=0, may be filled in the gaps.

(Fifth Modification)

In the case of forming the inter-conductor members in the stator 50 with a nonmagnetic material, the nonmagnetic material may be implemented by a non-resin material, for example a nonmagnetic metal material such as SUS 304 which is an austenitic stainless steel.

(Sixth Modification)

The stator 50 may include no stator core 52. In this case, the stator 50 is configured with the stator coil 51 shown in FIG. 12. In addition, in the case of the stator 50 including no stator core 52, the stator coil 51 may be sealed with a sealing material. Alternatively, the stator 50 may include, instead of the stator core 52 formed of a soft-magnetic material, a stator coil holder that is annular in shape and formed of a nonmagnetic material such as a synthetic resin.

(Seventh Modification)

In the first embodiment, the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 is configured with the plurality of magnets 91 and 92 arranged in the circumferential direction. As an alternative, the magnet unit 42 may be configured with an annular magnet which is a permanent magnet. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the annular magnet 95 is fixed to the radially inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41. In the annular magnet 95, there are formed a plurality of magnetic poles the polarities of which alternate between N and S in the circumferential direction. Moreover, both the d-axis and the q-axis are defined in the one-piece structured annular magnet 95. Furthermore, in the annular magnet 95, arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths are formed so as to be oriented in a radial direction at the d-axis in each of the magnetic poles and oriented in the circumferential direction at the q-axis between each adjacent pair of the magnetic poles.

In addition, in the annular magnet 95, arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths may be formed such that the easy axis of magnetization is oriented to be parallel to or near parallel to the d-axis in d-axis-side portions, and oriented to be perpendicular to or near perpendicular to the q-axis in q-axis-side portions.

(Eighth Modification)

In this modification, part of the control method of the controller 110 is modified. Accordingly, the differences of this modification from the above-described first embodiment will be mainly described.

First, the processes performed by the operation signal generators 116 and 126 shown in FIG. 20 and the operation signal generators 130 a and 130 b shown in FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. In addition, the processes performed by the operation signal generators 116, 126, 130 a and 130 b are basically the same; therefore, only the process performed by the operation signal generator 116 will be described hereinafter.

The operation signal generator 116 includes a carrier signal generator 116 a and U-phase, V-phase and W-phase comparators 116 bU, 116 bV and 116 bW. In the present embodiment, the carrier signal generator 116 a generates and outputs a triangular-wave signal as a carrier signal SigC.

The carrier signal SigC generated by the carrier signal generator 116 a is inputted to each of the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase comparators 116 bU, 116 bV and 116 bW. Moreover, the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages calculated by the three-phase converter 115 are respectively inputted to the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase comparators 116 bU, 116 bV and 116 bW. The U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages are each in the form of, for example, a sine wave and offset in phase from each other by 120° in electrical angle.

The U-phase, V-phase and W-phase comparators 116 bU, 116 bV and 116 bW generate, by PWM (Pulse-Width Modulation) control based on comparison in amplitude between the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages and the carrier signal SigC, the operation signals for operating the upper-arm and lower-arm switches Sp and Sn of the U, V and W phases in the first inverter 101. More specifically, the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase comparators 116 bU, 116 bV and 116 bW generate the operation signals for operating the switches Sp and Sn of the U, V and W phases by the PWM control based on comparison in amplitude between signals, which are obtained by normalizing the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase command voltages with respect to the power supply voltage, and the carrier signal SigC. Then, the driver 117 turns on and off the switches Sp and Sn of the U, V and W phases in the first inverter 101 based on the operation signals generated by the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase comparators 116 bU, 116 bV and 116 bW of the operation signal generator 116.

The controller 110 performs a process of varying the carrier frequency fc of the carrier signal SigC, i.e., varying the switching frequency of the switches Sp and Sn. Specifically, the carrier frequency fc is set to be higher in a low-torque region or a high-rotation region of the rotating electric machine 10 and to be lower in a high-torque region of the rotating electric machine 10. Such a setting is performed for suppressing the controllability of electric current flowing in each phase winding from being lowered.

The inductance of the stator 50 can be lowered by employing a core-less structure for the stator 50. However, with the lowering of the inductance of the stator 50, the electrical time constant of the rotating electric machine 10 is accordingly lowered. Consequently, ripple of electric current flowing in each phase winding of the stator coil 51 may be increased and thus the controllability of the electric current may drop, causing the electric current control to diverge. Moreover, the influence of the controllability drop may become more remarkable when the electric current (e.g., the effective value of the electric current) flowing in each phasing winding is within a low-current region than when the electric current is within a high-current region. To cope with this problem, in this modification, the controller 110 varies the carrier frequency fc.

The process of varying the carrier frequency fc will be described with reference to FIG. 32. This process is repeatedly performed, as the process of the operation signal generator 116, by the controller 110 in a predetermined control cycle.

First, in step S10, the controller 110 determines whether electric current flowing in each phase winding 51 a is within the low-current region. This determination is made for determining whether the current torque of the rotating electric machine 10 is within the low-torque region. In addition, this determination can be made using, for example, either of the following first and second methods.

[First Method]

According to the first method, a torque estimation value of the rotating electric machine 10 is first calculated on the basis of the d-axis and q-axis currents obtained by the dq converter 112. Then, a determination is made as to whether the calculated torque estimation value is lower than a torque threshold value. If the calculated torque estimation value is lower than the torque threshold value, it is determined that the electric current flowing in each phase winding 51 a is within the low-current region. In contrast, if the calculated torque estimation value is higher than or equal to the torque threshold value, it is determined that the electric current flowing in each phase winding 51 a is within the high-current region. In addition, the torque threshold value may be set to, for example, ½ of a starting torque (or locked torque) of the rotating electric machine 10.

[Second Method]

According to the second method, a determination is made as to whether the rotation angle of the rotor 40 detected by the rotation angle detector is greater than or equal to a speed threshold value. If the rotation angle of the rotor 40 is greater than or equal to the speed threshold value, it is determined that the rotational speed of the rotor 40 is within the high-rotation region, i.e., the electric current flowing in each phase winding 51 a is within the low-current region. In addition, the speed threshold value may be set to, for example, the rotational speed value at which the maximum torque of the rotating electric machine 10 becomes equal to the torque threshold value.

Referring back to FIG. 32, if the determination in step S10 results in a “NO” answer, i.e., if the electric current flowing in each phase winding is within the high-current region, the process proceeds to step S11. In step S11, the controller 110 sets the carrier signal fc to a first frequency fL. Then, the process terminates. In contrast, if the determination in step S10 results in a “YES” answer, i.e., if the electric current flowing in each phase winding is within the low-current region, the process proceeds to step S12. In step S12, the controller 110 sets the carrier signal fc to a second frequency fH that is higher than the first frequency fL. Then, the process terminates.

As described above, in the present modification, the carrier frequency fc is set to be higher when the electric current flowing in each phase winding is within the low-current region than when the electric current is within the high-current region. Accordingly, the switching frequency of the switches Sp and Sn is set to be higher when the electric current flowing in each phase winding is within the low-current region than when the electric current is within the high-current region. Consequently, when the electric current flowing in each phase winding is within the low-current region, it is possible to suppress increase in ripple of the electric current flowing in each phase winding, thereby suppressing the controllability of the electric current from being lowered.

On the other hand, when the electric current flowing in each phase winding is within the high-current region, the amplitude of the electric current is higher than when the electric current is within the low-current region. Therefore, the increase in ripple of the electric current due to the lowering of the inductance affects the controllability of the electric current less. Accordingly, it is possible to set the carrier frequency fc to be lower when the electric current flowing in each phase winding is within the high-current region than when the electric current is within the low-current region, thereby reducing switching loss in the inverters 101 and 102.

Moreover, the following further modifications may be made in addition to the present modification.

In the process shown in FIG. 32, in the case of the carrier frequency fc having been set to the first frequency fL, when the determination in step S10 results in a “YES” answer, the carrier frequency fc may be gradually increased from the first frequency fL to the second frequency fH.

In contrast, in the case of the carrier frequency fc having been set to the second frequency fH, when the determination in step S10 results in a “NO” answer, the carrier frequency fc may be gradually decreased from the second frequency fH to the first frequency fL.

The operation signals for operating the switches may be generated by a SVM (Space Vector Modulation) control instead of the PWM control. In this case, it is also possible to apply the above-described process of varying the switching frequency.

(Ninth Modification)

In the above-described embodiments, there are provided two pairs of electrical conductors per phase, which constitute the electrical conductor groups 81. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 33(a), first and second electrical conductors 88 a and 88 b, each of which consists of one pair of electric conductors, are connected in parallel with each other. As an alternative, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the first and second electrical conductors 88 a and 88 b may be connected in series with each other.

Moreover, three or more pairs of multi-layer electrical conductors may be radially stacked. For example, FIG. 34 illustrates a configuration where first, second, third and fourth electrical conductors 88 a, 88 b, 88 c and 88 d, each of which consists of one pair of electric conductors, are radially stacked. More specifically, the first, second, third and fourth electrical conductors 88 a, 88 b, 88 c and 88 d are arranged in this order from the stator core 52 side so as to be in radial alignment with each other.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the third and fourth electrical conductors 88 c and 88 d may be connected in parallel with each other to form a parallel-connected unit; further, the first and second electrical conductors 88 a and 88 b may be respectively connected to opposite ends of the parallel-connected unit. With the parallel connection, it is possible to lower the electric current density of the parallel-connected electrical conductors, thereby reducing heat generated in these electrical conductors during energization thereof. Furthermore, in the configuration where the hollow cylindrical stator coil is assembled to the housing (i.e., the unit base 61) which has the cooling water passage 74 formed therein, the first and second electrical conductors 88 a and 88 b, which are not connected in parallel, are located closer than the parallel-connected third and fourth electrical conductors 88 c and 88 d to the stator core 52 that abuts the unit base 61. Consequently, it becomes possible to equalize the cooling performances of the electrical conductors 88 a-88 d in the multi-layer conductor structure.

In addition, the radial thickness of the electrical conductor groups 81, which are constituted of the electrical conductors 88 a-88 d, may be set to be smaller than the circumferential width per phase in each magnetic pole.

(Tenth Modification)

The rotating electric machine 10 may alternatively be configured to have an inner rotor structure (i.e., inner rotating structure). In this case, in the housing 30, the rotor 40 is arranged radially inside the stator 50. Moreover, in this case, the inverter unit 60 may be provided at either or both of axial ends of the rotor 40 and the stator 50. FIG. 35 is a transverse cross-sectional view of both the rotor 40 and the stator 50. FIG. 36 is an enlarged view of part of FIG. 35.

The configuration of the inner rotor type rotating electric machine 10 shown in FIGS. 35 and 36 is identical to the configuration of the outer rotor type rotating electric machine 10 shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 except for the radial positional relationship between the rotor 40 and the stator 50. Specifically, in the inner rotor type rotating electric machine 10, the stator 50 also includes a stator coil 51 having a flat conductor structure, and a toothless stator core 52. The stator coil 51 is assembled to the radially inner periphery of the stator core 52. Moreover, the stator 50 may have any of the following configurations (A)-(C) as in the case of the outer rotor structure.

(A) In the stator 50, inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction. The inter-conductor members are formed of a magnetic material satisfying the following relationship: Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wt is the circumferential width of the inter-conductor members per magnetic pole, Bs is the saturation flux density of the inter-conductor members, Wm is the circumferential width of the magnet unit per magnetic pole and Br is the residual flux density of the magnet unit.

(B) In the stator 50, inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction. The inter-conductor members are formed of a nonmagnetic material.

(C) In the stator 50, no inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction.

Moreover, the configuration of the magnets 91 and 92 of the magnet unit 42 in the inner rotor type rotating electric machine is similar to that in the outer rotor type rotating electric machine. That is, the magnet unit 42 is configured with the magnets 91 and 92 each of which is oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is more parallel to the d-axis on the d-axis side than on the q-axis side; the d-axis represents the centers of the magnetic poles while the q-axis represents the boundaries between the magnetic poles. The details of the magnetization directions in the magnets 91 and 92 are the same as described previously. In addition, the magnet unit 42 may alternatively be configured with an annular magnet 95 (see FIG. 30).

FIG. 37 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the inner rotor type rotating electric machine 10, which corresponds to FIG. 2 described above. Hereinafter, the differences of the configuration shown in FIG. 37 from the configuration shown in FIG. 2 will be briefly described. In the inner rotor type rotating electric machine 10 shown in FIG. 37, the annular stator 50 is fixed to the inner periphery of the housing 30. The rotor 40 is rotatably provided inside the stator 50 with a predetermined air gap formed therebetween. The rotor 40 is supported in a cantilever fashion via the bearings 21 and 22 that are arranged on one axial side of the axially center position of the rotor 40 as in the configuration shown in FIG. 2. The inverter unit 60 is provided inside the magnet holder 41 of the rotor 40.

FIG. 38 shows an alternative configuration of the inner rotor type rotating electric machine 10. In this configuration, in the housing 30, the rotating shaft 11 is rotatably supported directly by the bearings 21 and 22. The rotor 40 is fixed on the rotating shaft 11. The bearings 21 and 22 are arranged on one axial side of the axially center position of the rotor 40 as in the configuration shown in FIG. 2. The rotor 40 includes the magnet holder 41 and the magnet unit 42.

The rotating electric machine 10 shown in FIG. 38 differs from the rotating electric machine 10 shown in FIG. 37 in that no inverter unit 60 is provided radially inside the rotor 40. The magnet holder 41 is located radially inside the magnet unit 42 and connected to the rotating shaft 11. The stator 50 includes the stator coil 51 and the stator core 52. The stator 50 is mounted to the housing 30.

(Eleventh Modification)

Another alternative configuration of an inner rotor type rotating electric machine will be described. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of an inner rotor type rotating electric machine 200. FIG. 40 is a side cross-sectional view of the inner rotor type rotating electric machine 200. Hereinafter, the vertical direction denotes the vertical direction in FIGS. 39 and 40.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the rotating electric machine 200 includes a stator 203, which includes an annular stator core 201 and a multi-phase stator coil 202, and a rotor 204 that is rotatably disposed radially inside the stator core 201. The stator 203 functions as an armature while the rotor 204 functions as a field system. The stator core 201 is formed by laminating a plurality of silicon steel sheets. The stator coil 202 is mounted to the stator core 201. The rotor 204 includes, though not shown in the figures, a rotor core and a magnet unit constituted of a plurality of permanent magnets. In the rotor core, there are formed a plurality of magnet insertion holes at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. In each of the magnet insertion holes, there is inserted one of the permanent magnets. The permanent magnets are magnetized so that the magnetization directions of adjacent magnetic poles alternately change. In addition, the arrangement of the permanent magnets of the magnet unit may be the same as or similar to the Halbach array shown in FIG. 23. Alternatively, the permanent magnets of the magnet unit may have polar anisotropic characteristics as shown in FIG. 9 or FIG. 30; the polar anisotropic characteristics are such that the orientation direction (i.e., the magnetization direction) extends in an arc shape between the d-axis at the center of each of the magnetic poles and the q-axis at the boundary between each adjacent pair of the magnetic poles.

The stator 203 may have any of the following configurations (A)-(C).

(A) In the stator 203, inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction. The inter-conductor members are formed of a magnetic material satisfying the following relationship: Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wt is the circumferential width of the inter-conductor members per magnetic pole, Bs is the saturation flux density of the inter-conductor members, Wm is the circumferential width of the magnet unit per magnetic pole and Br is the residual flux density of the magnet unit.

(B) In the stator 203, inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction. The inter-conductor members are formed of a nonmagnetic material.

(C) In the stator 203, no inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction.

In the rotor 204, the magnet unit is configured with the permanent magnets where the easy axis of magnetization is oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is more parallel to the d-axis on the d-axis side than on the q-axis side.

At one axial end of the rotating electric machine 200, there is arranged an annular inverter case 211 so that a lower end surface of the inverter case 211 abuts an upper end surface of the stator core 201. In the inverter case 211, there are provided: a plurality of power modules 212 forming an inverter circuit; a smoothing capacitor 213 for suppressing voltage/current ripple caused by switching operation of semiconductor switching elements; a control substrate 214 including a controller; current sensors 215 for detecting phase currents; and a resolver stator 216 that is a stator part of a resolver for detecting the rotational speed of the rotor 204. The power modules 212 include the respective semiconductor switching elements, which are implemented by, for example, IGBTs, and diodes.

On a peripheral portion of the inverter case 211, there are provided a power connector 217 connected to a DC circuit of a battery mounted in a vehicle, and a signal connector 218 used for exchange of various signals between the rotating electric machine 200 and a vehicle-side controller. The inverter case 211 is covered by a top cover 219. DC power from the in-vehicle battery is inputted via the power connector 217, converted into AC power by the switching of the power modules 212, and supplied to each phase winding of the stator coil 202.

On an opposite axial side of the stator core 201 to the inverter case 211, there are provided: a bearing unit 221 for rotatably supporting a rotating shaft of the rotor 204; and an annular rear case 222 that receives the bearing unit 221 therein. The bearing unit 221, which includes a pair of bearings, is arranged on one axial side of an axially center position of the rotor 204. It should be noted the bearing unit 221 may alternatively include bearings respectively arranged on opposite axial sides of the stator core 201 to rotatably support the rotating shaft. The rotating electric machine 200 is configured to be mounted to a mounting part, such as a gear case or a transmission case, of the vehicle by bolt-fastening the rear case 222 to the mounting part.

In the inverter case 211, there is formed a coolant passage 211 a through which a coolant flows. The coolant passage 211 a is constituted of an annular recess that is formed in the lower end surface of the inverter case 211 and closed by the upper end surface of the stator core 201. Moreover, the coolant passage 211 a is formed so as to surround a coil end of the stator coil 202. In the coolant passage 211 a, there are inserted module cases 212 a of the power modules 212. In the rear case 222, there is formed a coolant passage 222 a so as to surround another coil end of the stator coil 202. The coolant passage 222 a is constituted of an annular recess that is formed in the upper end surface of the rear case 222 and closed by the lower end surface of the stator core 201.

(Twelfth Modification)

In the above-described embodiments and modifications, the rotating-field type rotating electric machines are illustrated. In contrast, this modification illustrates a rotating-armature type rotating electric machine 230. FIG. 41 shows the configuration of the rotating-armature type rotating electric machine 230.

In the rotating electric machine 230 shown in FIG. 41, each of housings 231 a and 231 b has one bearing 232 fixed thereto. A rotating shaft 233 is rotatably supported by the bearings 232. In addition, the bearings 232 may be implemented by, for example, oil-retaining bearings that are formed by impregnating oil into a porous metal. On the rotating shaft 233, there is fixed a rotor 234 that functions as an armature. The rotor 234 includes a rotor core 235 and a multi-phase rotor coil 236 fixed to an outer periphery of the rotor core 235. In the rotor 234, the rotor core 235 has a slot-less structure and the rotor coil 236 has a flat conductor structure. That is, the rotor coil 236 has a flat structure such that each region per phase is longer in a circumferential direction than in a radial direction.

On a radially outer side of the rotor 234, there is provided a stator 237 that functions as a field system. The stator 237 has a stator core 238 fixed to the housing 231 a and a magnet unit 239 fixed to an inner periphery of the stator core 238. The magnet unit 239 is configured to include a plurality of magnetic poles whose polarities alternate in the circumferential direction. Similar to the above-described magnet unit 42, the magnet unit 239 is also configured to have the easy axis of magnetization oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is more parallel to the d-axis on the d-axis side than on the q-axis side. The magnet unit 239 includes sintered neodymium magnets whose intrinsic coercive force is higher than or equal to 400 [kA/m] and residual flux density is higher than or equal to 1.0[T].

The rotating electric machine 230 according to the present modification is configured as a two-pole, three-coil, brushed and coreless motor. The rotor coil 236 is divided into three sub-coils, and the magnet unit 239 has two magnetic poles. In addition, brushed motors have, depending on the application, various ratios of the number of poles to the number of coils, such as 2:3, 4:10 and 4:21.

To the rotating shaft 233, there is also fixed a commutator 241. On the radially outer side of the commutator 241, there are arranged a plurality of brushes 242. The commutator 241 is electrically connected to the rotor coil 236 via electrical conductors 243 embedded in the rotating shaft 233. Consequently, DC current flows into and out of the rotor coil 236 via the commutator 241, the brushes 242 and the electrical conductors 243. The commutator 241 is circumferentially divided, according to the number of phases of the rotor coil 236, into a plurality of commutator segments. In addition, the brushes 242 may be electrically connected to a DC power supply, such as a storage battery, via electrical wiring or a terminal block.

On the rotating shaft 233, there is provided, as a sealing member, a resin washer 244 between the commutator 241 and the bearing 232. With the resin washer 244, oil seeping from the bearing 232, which is implemented by an oil-retaining bearing, is suppressed from flowing to the commutator 241 side.

(Thirteenth Modification)

In the rotating electric machines 10 according to the above-described embodiments and modifications, the electrical conductors 82 forming the stator coil 51 may be configured to have a plurality of insulating coats. For example, each of the electrical conductors 82 may be formed by bundling a plurality of wires each having an insulating coat into a wire bundle and then covering the wire bundle with an outer insulating coat. In this case, the insulating coats respectively covering the wires constitute inner insulating coats with respect to the outer insulating coat covering the entire wire bundle. Moreover, it is preferable to configure the outer insulating coat to have higher insulating capability than the inner insulating coats. Specifically, the outer insulating coat may have a larger thickness than the inner insulating coats. For example, the thickness of the outer insulating coat may be set to 100 μm while the thickness of each of the inner insulating coats is set to 40 μm. Moreover, the outer insulating coat may be formed of a material having lower permittivity than the inner insulating coats. That is, the insulating capability of the outer insulating coat may be set to be higher than the insulating capability of the inner insulating coats using at least one of the above methods. In addition, each of the wires may be formed of an aggregate of a plurality of electrically conductive bodies.

Setting the insulating capability of the outer insulating coat to be higher in each of the electrical conductors 82, the rotating electric machine 10 is made to be suitable for use in a high-voltage vehicular system. Moreover, it is possible to suitably drive the rotating electric machine 10 in a low atmospheric pressure high-altitude area.

(Fourteenth Modification)

Electrical conductors 82, which have a plurality of insulating coats, may be configured so that an outer insulating coat and an inner insulating coat are different from each other in at least one of coefficient of linear expansion and adhesion strength. FIG. 42 shows the configuration of electrical conductors 82 according to the present modification.

As shown in FIG. 42, in this modification, each of the electrical conductors 82 includes a plurality (e.g., four) of wires 181, a resin-made outer coat 182 (i.e., outer insulating coat) covering all of the plurality of wires 181, and an intermediate layer 183 (i.e., intermediate insulating coat) filled around each of the wires 181 within the outer coat 182. Each of the wires 181 includes a wire body 181 a formed of copper and a wire coat 181 b (i.e., inner insulating coat) formed of an insulating material and covering the wire body 181 a. In the stator coil, the inter-phase insulation is made by the outer coats 182 of the electrical conductors 82. In addition, each of the wires 181 may be formed of an aggregate of a plurality of electrically conductive bodies.

In each of the electrical conductors 82, the intermediate layer 183 has a coefficient of linear expansion higher than a coefficient of linear expansion of the wire coats 181 b of the wires 181 and lower than a coefficient of linear expansion of the outer coat 182. That is, in each of the electrical conductors 82, the coefficients of linear expansion of the plurality of insulating coats increase from the inner side to the outer side. In general, the coefficient of linear expansion of the outer coat 182 is higher than the coefficient of linear expansion of the wire coats 181 b. Interposing the intermediate layer 183 between the wire coats 181 b and the outer coat 182 and setting the coefficient of linear expansion of the intermediate layer 183 as above, the intermediate layer 183 can function as a cushion member to prevent the wire coats 181 b and the outer coat 182 from being cracked at the same time.

In each of the electrical conductors 82, the wire coat 181 b is adhered to the wire body 181 a in each of the wires 181 and the intermediate layer 183 is adhered to both the wire coats 181 b of the wires 181 and the outer coat 182. Moreover, in each of the electrical conductors 82, the adhesion strengths decrease from the inner side to the outer side. Specifically, the adhesion strength between the wire body 181 a and the wire coat 181 b in each of the wires 181 is higher than both the adhesion strength between the wire coats 181 b of the wires 181 and the intermediate layer 183 and the adhesion strength between the intermediate layer 83 and the outer coat 182. Further, the adhesion strength between the wire coats 181 b of the wires 181 and the intermediate layer 183 is higher than or equal to the adhesion strength between the intermediate layer 183 and the outer coat 182. In addition, the adhesion strength between two insulating coats can be determined based on the tensile strength required to tear them off from each other. Setting the adhesion strengths in each of the electrical conductors 82 as above, when a temperature difference between the inner and outer sides occurs due to heating or cooling, it is possible to prevent cracking from occurring on both the inner and outer sides at the same time.

In the rotating electric machine, heat generation and temperature change occur mainly as copper loss at the wire bodies 181 a of the wires 181 in each of the electrical conductors 82 and iron loss in the core. That is, these two types of losses occur at the wire bodies 181 a of the wires 181 in each of the electrical conductors 82 or outside the electrical conductors 82; there is no heat source in the intermediate layers 183 of the electrical conductors 82. In this case, in each of the electrical conductors 82, with the adhesion strengths set as described above, the intermediate layer 83 can function as a cushion member to prevent the wire coats 181 b of the wires 181 and the outer coat 182 from being cracked at the same time. Therefore, the rotating electric machine can be suitably used in an environment where it is required to withstand great pressure and temperature changes, such as in a vehicle.

Each of the wires 181 may be enamel-coated. In this case, each of the wires 181 has the wire coat 181 b formed of a resin such as a PA, PI or PAI resin. The outer coat 182, which is provided outside the wires 181, may also be formed of a resin such as a PA, PI or PAI resin. In this case, it is preferable for the outer coat 182 to have a larger thickness than the wire coats 181 b of the wires 181. Consequently, it is possible to prevent the insulating coats from being damaged due to the difference in coefficients of linear expansion. On the other hand, in terms of improving the conductor density of the rotating electric machine, it is preferable to form the outer coat 182 with a resin having lower permittivity than the PA, PI or PAI resin, such as a PPS, PEEK, fluorine, polycarbonate, silicone, epoxy, polyethylene naphthalate or LCP resin. In this case, with the smaller or same thickness of the outer coat 182 in comparison with the case of using the PA, PI or PAI resin, it is possible to improve the insulating capability of the outer coat 182, thereby improving the space factors of the electrical conductor sections. In general, the aforementioned resins have higher insulating capability than enamel-formed insulating coats. As a matter of course, the permittivity may be degraded depending on the forming state and impurities. Among the aforementioned resins, a PPS or PEEK resin, whose coefficient of linear expansion is higher than those of enamel-formed insulating coats but lower than those of other resins, is particularly suitable for forming the second-layer outer coat.

Moreover, it is preferable that the adhesion strengths between the two types of insulating coats (i.e., the intermediate insulating coat and the outer insulating coat) provided outside the wires 181 and the enamel-formed insulating coats of the wires 181 are lower than the adhesion strength between the copper wire and the enamel-formed insulating coat in each of the wires 181. Consequently, it is possible to prevent the enamel-formed insulating coats of the wires 181 and the two types of insulating coats provided outside the wires 181 from being damaged at the same time.

In the case of a stator having a water-cooled, liquid-cooled or air-cooled structure, it is basically considered that thermal stress and/or impact stress act first on the outer coat 182. However, even when the wire coats 181 b of the wires 181 are formed of a different resin from the two types of insulating coats provided outside the wires 181, it is possible to have portions of the wires 181 not adhered to the two types of insulating coats, thereby reducing the aforementioned thermal stress and/or impact stress. Specifically, the outer coat 182 may be formed, using a fluorine, polycarbonate, silicone, epoxy, polyethylene naphthalate or LCP resin, outside the wires 181 with a void space provided between the wires 181 and the outer coat 182. In this case, it is preferable to bond the outer coat 182 and the wire coats 181 b of the wires 181 to each other using an adhesive which has low permittivity and low coefficient of linear expansion, such as an epoxy adhesive. In this case, it is possible to enhance the mechanical strength, prevent the inner and outer insulating coasts from being damaged due to friction caused by vibration of the electrical conductor sections and prevent the outer insulating coat from being damaged due to the difference in coefficient of linear expansion between the inner and outer insulating coasts.

In addition, in the step of fixing the electrical conductors 82 which is generally performed as a final insulation step of the manufacturing process of the stator, it is preferable to use a resin having excellent formability and similar properties (e.g., permittivity, coefficient of linear expansion, etc.) to the enamel-formed insulating coats, such as an epoxy, PPS, PEEK or LCP resin.

In general, resin potting is performed using a urethane or silicone resin. However, these resins have a coefficient of linear expansion considerably different from those of the other resins used; therefore thermal stress may be induced which may shear these resins. Therefore, these resins are not suitable for applications of 60V or higher on which strict insulation regulations are internationally imposed. In this regard, performing injection molding with an epoxy, PPS, PEEK or LCP resin as the final insulation step, it is possible to satisfy the above requirements.

Other modifications will be described hereinafter.

The radial distance DM from the armature-side surface of the magnet unit 42 to the axis of the rotor may be set to be greater than or equal to 50 mm. Specifically, as shown in, for example, FIG. 4, the radial distance DM from the radially inner surface of the magnet unit 42 (more specifically, the radially inner surfaces of the first and second magnets 91 and 92) to the axis of the rotor 40 may be set to be greater than or equal to 50 mm.

As slot-less rotating electric machines, small-scale rotating electric machines have been known whose outputs are from several tens of watts to several hundreds of watts and which are used for model applications. However, the inventor of the present application has found no examples where large-scale rotating electric machines for industrial applications, whose outputs generally exceed 10 kW, employ a slot-less structure. Therefore, the inventor has investigated the reasons.

Recent mainstream rotating electric machines can be classified into the following four types: brushed motors, squirrel cage induction motors, permanent magnet synchronous motors and reluctance motors.

Brushed motors are supplied with exciting current via brushes. However, in the case of large-scale brushed motors, the sizes of brushes are large and maintenance is troublesome. Therefore, with remarkable developments in semiconductor technologies, large-scale brushed motors have been replaced with brushless motors such as induction motors. On the other hand, some small-scale brushed motors employ a coreless structure due to low inertia and economic benefits.

Squirrel cage induction motors generate torque by having the magnetic field, which is created by a primary-side stator coil, received by a secondary-side rotor core and causing induced current to be concentrated on a squirrel cage-shaped electrical conductor to create a counteracting magnetic field. Therefore, configuring both the rotor and the stator to include no core is not necessarily beneficial in terms of minimization of the sizes and improvement of the efficiencies of squirrel cage induction motors.

Reluctance motors generate torque utilizing the reluctance change in a core. Therefore, in terms of basic principles, it is undesirable to eliminate the core.

Regarding permanent magnet synchronous motors, IPM (Interior Permanent Magnet) motors are the recent mainstream motors. Therefore, unless for special reasons, large-scale permanent magnet synchronous motors are IPM motors in most cases.

IPM motors can generate both magnet torque and reluctance torque. Moreover, IPM motors are operated with the ratio between the generated magnet and reluctance torques suitably adjusted by an inverter control. Therefore, IPM motors are small in size and superior in controllability.

According to an analysis by the inventor of the present application, the relationships between magnet torque, reluctance torque and the radial distance DM from the armature-side surface of the magnet unit 42 to the axis of the rotor (i.e., the radius of the stator core in the case of the rotating electric machine being of an inner rotor type) are as shown in FIG. 43.

The magnet torque has its potential determined by the strength of the magnetic field created by the permanent magnets as shown in the following equation (eq 1). In contrast, the reluctance torque has its potential determined by the amplitudes of the inductances, in particular the amplitude of the q-axis inductance as shown in the following equation (eq 2).

Magnet torque=k·Ψ·Iq  (eq 1)

Reluctance torque=k·(Lq−Ld)·Iq·Id  (eq 2)

Here, a comparison is made between the strength of the magnetic field created by the permanent magnets and the amplitudes of the inductances of the coil using the radial distance DM. The strength of the magnetic field created by the permanent magnets, i.e., the amount of magnetic flux Ψ, is proportional to the total surface area of the permanent magnets facing the stator. In the case of the rotor being cylindrical in shape, the total surface area is represented by the surface area of the cylinder. Strictly speaking, due to the presence of N and S poles, the amount of magnetic flux Ψ is proportional to half the surface area of the cylinder. Moreover, the surface area of the cylinder is proportional to both the radius of the cylinder and the length of the cylinder. That is, with the length of the cylinder being constant, the amount of magnetic flux Ψ is proportional to the radius of the cylinder.

On the other hand, the inductance Lq of the coil is dependent on, but less sensitive to the core shape. The inductance Lq is proportional to the square of the number of turns of the stator coil, i.e., highly dependent on the number of turns of the stator coil. Moreover, the inductance L can be determined by the following equation: L=μ×N²×S/δ, where μ is the permeability of the magnetic circuit, N is the number of turns, S is the cross-sectional area of the magnetic circuit and δ is the effective length of the magnetic circuit. The number of turns of the coil depends on the volume of the coil space. In the case of the rotating electric machine being a cylindrical motor, the number of turns depends on the coil space of the stator, i.e., depends on the slot area. As shown in FIG. 44, in the case of the slots having a substantially rectangular shape, the slot area is proportional to the product of the circumferential dimension a and the radial dimension b of each slot (i.e., a×b).

The circumferential dimension of each slot increases in proportion to the diameter of the cylinder. The radial dimension of each slot also increases in proportion to the diameter of the cylinder. Therefore, the slot area is proportional to the square of the diameter of the cylinder. Moreover, as can be seen from above (eq 2), the reluctance torque is proportional to the square of the stator current. Therefore, the performance of the rotating electric machine depends on the amplitude of the stator current and thus on the slot area of the stator. As above, with the length of the cylinder being constant, the reluctance torque is proportional to the square of the diameter of the cylinder. The relationships between the magnet torque, the reluctance torque and the radial distance DM are determined based on the above observations and illustrated in FIG. 43.

As can be seen from FIG. 43, the magnet torque linearly increases with the radial distance DM while the reluctance torque quadratically increases with the radial distance DM. When the radial distance DM is relatively small, the magnet torque is dominant. However, with increase in the radial distance DM, the reluctance torque becomes dominant. The inventor of the present application has concluded that the intersection point between the magnet torque and the reluctance torque in FIG. 43 is in the vicinity of DM=50 mm under predetermined conditions. That is, in 10 kW-class electric motors where the stator core radius sufficiently exceeds 50 mm, the current mainstream technique is to utilize the reluctance torque; therefore, it is difficult to eliminate the core. This can be considered to be one of the reasons why the slot-less structure is not employed in large-scale rotating electric machines.

In the case of rotating electric machines including a stator core, magnetic saturation of the stator core is always a problem to be solved. In particular, in radial-gap type rotating electric machines, the rotating shaft has a longitudinal cross section which has one fan-shaped sector per magnetic pole. The magnetic path width decreases in a radially inward direction and the performance limit of the rotating electric machine is determined by the radially inner-side dimensions of the stator teeth forming the slots. Even when high-performance permanent magnets are employed, upon occurrence of magnetic saturation at radially inner portions of the stator teeth, it becomes impossible to sufficiently utilize the high performance of the permanent magnets. To prevent magnetic saturation from occurring at the radially inner portions of the stator teeth, it is necessary to increase the inner diameter of the stator core. However, with increase in the inner diameter of the stator core, the size of the entire rotating electric machine is increased.

For example, in a distributed-winding rotating electric machine which includes a three-phase coil, there are provided, for each magnetic pole, three to six teeth through which magnetic flux flows. However, magnetic flux tends to concentrate on those of the teeth located on the front side in the circumferential direction; i.e., magnetic flux is unevenly distributed to the three to six teeth. In this case, magnetic flux becomes concentrated on some (e.g., one or two) of the three to six teeth; with rotation of the rotor, the magnetically-saturated teeth also move in the circumferential direction, causing slot ripple to occur.

As above, in slot-less rotating electric machines where the radial distance DM is greater than or equal to 50 mm, to prevent occurrence of magnetic saturation, it is desirable to eliminate teeth. However, when teeth are eliminated, magnetic reluctance of the magnetic circuit in the rotor and the stator may increase, thereby lowering the torque of the rotating electric machine. This is because without teeth, the air gap between the rotor and the stator may increase. Therefore, there is room to increase torque in slot-less rotating electric machines where the radial distance DM is greater than or equal to 50 mm. Consequently, significant advantages can be achieved by applying the above-described torque-increasing configurations to slot-less rotating electric machines where the radial distance DM is greater than or equal to 50 mm.

In addition, the radial distance DM from the armature-side surface of the magnet unit to the axis of the rotor may be preferably set to be greater than or equal to 50 mm not only in outer rotor type rotating electric machines but also in inner rotor type rotating electric machines.

In the stator coil 51 of the rotating electric machine 10, the straight portions 83 of the electrical conductors 82 may be arranged in a single layer in the radial direction. Otherwise, in the case of arranging the straight portions 83 of the electrical conductors 82 in a plurality of layers in the radial direction, the number of the layers may be set to any arbitrary number, such as 3, 4, 5 or 6.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the rotating shaft 11 protrudes to both axial sides of the rotating electric machine 10. As an alternative, the rotating shaft 11 may protrude to only one axial side of the rotating electric machine 10. For example, the rotating shaft 11 may have an end portion supported in a cantilever fashion by the bearing unit 20; the remainder of the rotating shaft 11 protrudes, on the opposite axial side of the bearing unit 20 to the inverter unit 60, axially outside the rotating electric machine 10. In this case, the rotating shaft 11 does not protrude inside the inverter unit 60. Consequently, the available internal space of the inverter unit 60, more specifically the available internal space of the cylindrical portion 71 is increased.

In the rotating electric machine 10 configured as described above, non-electrically conductive grease is used in the bearings 21 and 22. As an alternative, electrically conductive grease may be used in the bearings 21 and 22. For example, electrically conductive grease which contains metal particles or carbon particles may be used in the bearings 21 and 22.

The rotating shaft 11 may be rotatably supported by bearings provided at two locations respectively on opposite axial sides of the rotor 40. More specifically, in the configuration shown in FIG. 1, the rotating shaft 11 may alternatively be rotatably supported by bearings provided at two locations respectively on opposite axial sides of the inverter unit 60.

In the rotating electric machine 10 configured as described above, the intermediate portion 45 of the magnet holder 41 of the rotor 40 has both the annular inner shoulder part 49 a and the annular outer shoulder part 49 b formed therein. As an alternative, the intermediate portion 45 may be configured to have a flat surface without the shoulder parts 49 a and 49 b formed therein.

In the rotating electric machine 10 configured as described above, each of the electrical conductors 82 forming the stator coil 51 has its conductor body 82 a constituted of a bundle of wires 86. As an alternative, each of the electrical conductors 82 may be configured with a single flat wire which has a rectangular cross-sectional shape. As another alternative, each of the electrical conductors 82 may be configured with a single round wire which has a circular or elliptical cross-sectional shape.

In the rotating electric machine 10 configured as described above, the inverter unit 60 is provided radially inside the stator 50. As an alternative, the inverter unit 60 may not be provided radially inside the stator 50. In this case, the internal space of the stator 50, which was occupied by the inverter unit 60, may remain as a hollow space or be occupied by a different component to the inverter unit 60.

In the rotating electric machine 10 configured as described above, the housing 30 may be omitted from the configuration of the rotating electric machine 10. In this case, both the rotor 40 and the stator 50 may be held by, for example, a wheel or other vehicle components.

(Embodiment as Vehicular In-Wheel Motor)

Next, explanation will be given of an embodiment according to which a rotating electric machine is provided as an in-wheel motor that is incorporated in a wheel of a vehicle. FIG. 45 is a perspective view of a wheel 400, which has an in-wheel motor structure, and its peripheral structures. FIG. 46 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the wheel 400 and its peripheral structures. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the wheel 400. It should be noted that each of these figures shows the wheel 400 viewed from the inside of the vehicle. In addition, in the vehicle, the in-wheel motor structure according to the present embodiment may be applied in various modes. For example, in the case of the vehicle having two front wheels and two rear wheels, the in-wheel motor structure according to the present embodiment may be applied to only the two front wheels, only the two rear wheels or all of the four wheels. Moreover, the in-wheel motor structure according to the present embodiment may also be applied to the case of the vehicle having, on at least one of the front and rear sides, only a single wheel. In addition, in these examples, the in-wheel motor is applied as a vehicular drive unit.

As shown in FIGS. 45-47, the wheel 400 includes a tire 401 that is, for example, a well-known pneumatic tire, a rim 402 fixed to the radially inner periphery of the tire 401, and the rotating electric machine 500 fixed to the radially inner periphery of the rim 402. The rotating electric machine 500 has a fixed part that includes a stator, and a rotating part that includes a rotor. The fixed part is fixed to the vehicle body side while the rotating part is fixed to the rim 402. With rotation of the rotating part, the tire 401 and the rim 402 also rotate. In addition, the configuration of the rotating electric machine 500 including the fixed part and the rotating part will be described in detail later.

Moreover, to the wheel 400, there are mounted, as peripheral equipment, a suspension apparatus for holding the wheel 400 with respect to the not-shown vehicle body, a steering apparatus for varying orientation of the wheel 400, and a brake apparatus for performing braking of the wheel 400.

The suspension apparatus is an independent suspension apparatus. The suspension apparatus may be of any suitable type, such as trailing arm type, strut type, wishbone type or multi-link type. In the present embodiment, the suspension apparatus includes a lower arm 411 oriented to extend toward the vehicle body center, and a suspension arm 412 and a spring 413 both of which are oriented to extend in the vertical direction. The suspension arm 412 may be configured as, for example, a shock absorber. It should be noted that the details of the suspension arm 412 are not shown in the figures. Each of the lower arm 411 and the suspension arm 412 is connected to the vehicle body side as well as to a circular base plate 405 that is fixed to the fixed part of the rotating electric machine 500. As shown in FIG. 46, on the rotating electric machine 500 side (or the base plate 405 side), the lower arm 411 and the suspension arm 412 are supported, by supporting shafts 414 and 415, so as to be coaxial with each other.

The steering apparatus may employ, for example, a rack and pinion mechanism, a ball and nut mechanism, hydraulic power steering system or an electric power steering system. In the present embodiment, the steering apparatus includes a rack device 421 and a tie rod 422. The rack device 421 is connected, via the tie rod 422, to the base plate 405 on the rotating electric machine 500 side. In this case, with rotation of a not-shown steering shaft, the rack device 421 operates to cause the tie rod 422 to move in the left-right direction of the vehicle. Consequently, the wheel 400 is turned about the supporting shaft 414 and 415 of the lower arm 411 and the suspension arm 412, changing the orientation of the wheel 400.

It is preferable for the brake apparatus to employ a disc brake or a drum brake. In the present embodiment, the brake apparatus includes a disc rotor 431 fixed to a rotating shaft 501 of the rotating electric machine 500 and a brake caliper 432 fixed to the base plate 405 on the rotating electric machine 500 side. In the brake caliper 432, brake pads are hydraulically actuated to be pressed on the disc rotor 431, generating a braking force by friction. Consequently, with the generated braking force, rotation of the wheel 400 is stopped.

Moreover, to the wheel 400, there are mounted a receiving duct 440 that receives an electrical wiring H1 and a cooling water piping H2 both of which extend from the rotating electric machine 500. The receiving duct 440 extends, from its end on the side of the fixed part of the rotating electric machine 500, along an end face of the rotating electric machine 500 without interfering with the suspension arm 412. The receiving duct 440 is fixed to the suspension arm 412. Consequently, the positional relationship between a connection portion of the suspension arm 412, to which the receiving duct 440 is connected, and the base plate 405 is fixed. As a result, it is possible to suppress stress induced in the electrical wiring H1 and the cooling water piping H2 by, for example, vibration of the vehicle. In addition, the electrical wiring H1 is connected to an in-vehicle power supply and an in-vehicle ECU both of which are not shown in the figures, while the cooling water piping H2 is connected to a radiator that is also not shown in the figures.

Next, the configuration of the rotating electric machine 500 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. As mentioned above, in the present embodiment, the rotating electric machine 500 is configured as an in-wheel motor. The rotating electric machine 500 has superior operational efficiency and output to a motor of a conventional vehicular drive unit which includes a speed reducer. It should be noted that the rotating electric machine 500 may alternatively be used in other applications provided that a reasonable price can be realized by cost reduction and superior performance can be maintained. In addition, the operational efficiency is an indicator used in a test in a traveling mode for evaluating the fuel economy of the vehicle.

The outline of the rotating electric machine 500 is illustrated in FIGS. 48-51. FIG. 48 is a side view of the rotating electric machine 500 from the protruding side of the rotating shaft 501 (or from the inside of the vehicle). FIG. 49 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the rotating electric machine 500 (i.e., a cross-sectional view taken along the line 49-49 in FIG. 48). FIG. 50 is a transverse cross-sectional view of the rotating electric machine 500 (i.e., a cross-sectional view taken along the line 50-50 in FIG. 49). FIG. 51 is an exploded cross-sectional view of the rotating electric machine 500. In the explanation given hereinafter, the direction in which the rotating shaft 501 extends outside the vehicle body in FIG. 51 will be referred to as the axial direction. The directions extending radially from the rotating shaft 501 will be referred to as radial directions. Both directions extending along a circle from an arbitrary point, except the center of rotation of the rotating part, on a centerline will be referred to as the circumferential direction; the centerline is drawn for making the cross section 49 through the center of the rotating shaft 501 in FIG. 48, in other words, through the center of rotation of the rotating part. That is, the circumferential direction denotes both the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction with the start point being an arbitrary point in the cross section 49. Moreover, in the state of the rotating electric machine 500 having been mounted along with the wheel 400 to the vehicle, the right side in FIG. 49 corresponds to the outside of the vehicle while the left side in FIG. 49 corresponds to the inside of the vehicle. In addition, in this state, a rotor 510, which will be described later, is located more outward of the vehicle body than a rotor cover 670.

The rotating electric machine 500 according to the present embodiment is an outer rotor type SPM (Surface Permanent Magnet) motor. The rotating electric machine 500 mainly includes the aforementioned rotor 510, a stator 520, an inverter unit 530, a bearing 560 and the aforementioned rotor cover 670. These components are arranged coaxially with the rotating shaft 501 that is formed integrally with the rotor 510. These components are assembled in a predetermined sequence in the axial direction to together constitute the rotating electric machine 500.

In the rotating electric machine 500, the rotor 510 and the stator 520 are each cylindrical-shaped and radially opposed to each other with a predetermined air gap formed therebetween. The rotor 510 rotates, together with the rotating shaft 501, on the radially outer side of the stator 520. In the present embodiment, the rotor 510 functions as a “field system” while the stator 520 functions as an “armature”.

The rotor 510 includes a substantially cylindrical rotor carrier 511 and an annular magnet unit 512 fixed to the rotor carrier 511. The rotating shaft 501 is also fixed to the rotor carrier 511.

The rotor carrier 511 has a cylindrical portion 513. On an inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 513, there is mounted the magnet unit 512. That is, the magnet unit 512 is provided so as to be surrounded by the cylindrical portion 513 of the rotor carrier 511 from the radially outer side. The cylindrical portion 513 of the rotor carrier 511 has an axially opposite pair of first and second ends. The first end is located more outward of the vehicle body than the second end; the second end is located closer than the first end to the base plate 405. At the first end of the cylindrical portion 513, there is formed an end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511 continuously with the cylindrical portion 513. That is, the cylindrical portion 513 and the end plate 514 are integrally formed into one piece. At the second end of the cylindrical portion 513, there is formed an opening. In addition, the rotor carrier 511 is formed of a material having sufficient mechanical strength, such as a cold-rolled steel sheet (e.g., an SPCC steel sheet or an SPHC steel sheet having a larger thickness than the SPCC steel sheet), forged steel or Carbon Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (CFRP).

The axial length of the rotating shaft 501 is larger than the axial length of the rotor carrier 511. Therefore, the rotating shaft 501 protrudes from the second end (or the opening) of the rotor carrier 511 in the direction toward the inside of the vehicle. On a protruding end portion of the rotating shaft 501, there are mounted other components such as the above-described brake apparatus.

In a central part of the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511, there is formed a through-hole 514 a. The rotating shaft 501 is fixed to the rotor carrier 511 in a state of being inserted in the through-hole 514 a of the end plate 514. The rotating shaft 501 has a flange 502 formed at an axial end thereof so as to extend nonparallel (or perpendicular) to the axial direction. The rotating shaft 501 is fixed to the rotor carrier 511 with the flange 502 of the rotating shaft 501 in surface contact with an outer surface of the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511. In addition, in the wheel 400, the rim 402 is fixed to the rotating shaft 501 by fasteners such as bolts extending from the flange 502 of the rotating shaft 501 in the direction toward the outside of the vehicle.

The magnet unit 512 is constituted of a plurality of permanent magnets that are arranged on the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 513 of the rotor carrier 511 so as to have their polarities alternately changing in the circumferential direction of the rotor 510. Consequently, the magnet unit 512 has a plurality of magnetic poles arranged in the circumferential direction. The permanent magnets are fixed to the rotor carrier 511 by, for example, bonding. In the present embodiment, the magnet unit 512 has a similar configuration to the magnet unit 42 described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 in the first embodiment. Moreover, the permanent magnets of the magnet unit 512 are implemented by sintered neodymium magnets whose intrinsic coercive force is higher than or equal to 400 [kA/m] and residual flux density Br is higher than or equal to 1.0[T].

Similar to the magnet unit 42 shown in FIG. 9, the magnet unit 512 according to the present embodiment is also constituted of first and second magnets 91 and 92 that are polar anisotropic magnets. The polarity of the first magnets 91 is different from the polarity of the second magnets 92. As described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 in the first embodiment, in each of the first and second magnets 91 and 92, the orientation of the easy axis of magnetization on the d-axis side (or in the d-axis-side part) is different from the orientation of the easy axis of magnetization on the q-axis side (or in the q-axis-side parts). On the d-axis side, the orientation of the easy axis of magnetization is close to a direction parallel the d-axis. In contrast, on the q-axis side, the orientation of the easy axis of magnetization is close to a direction perpendicular to the q-axis. Consequently, depending on the change in the orientation of the easy axis of magnetization, arc-shaped magnetic paths are formed in the magnet. In addition, in each of the first and second magnets 91 and 92, the easy axis of magnetization may be oriented to be parallel to the d-axis on the d-axis side and to be perpendicular to the q-axis on the q-axis side. That is, the magnet unit 512 is configured to have the easy axis of magnetization oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is more parallel to the d-axis on the d-axis side than on the q-axis side; the d-axis represents the centers of the magnetic poles while the q-axis represents the boundaries between the magnetic poles.

With the above configuration of the magnets 91 and 92, the magnet magnetic flux on the d-axis is intensified and the magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q-axis is suppressed. Consequently, it becomes possible to suitably realize the magnets 91 and 92 where the surface magnetic flux gradually changes from the q-axis to the d-axis in each magnetic pole. In addition, the magnet unit 512 may alternatively employ the configuration of the magnet unit 42 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 or the configuration of the magnet unit 42 shown in FIG. 30.

The magnet unit 512 may have, on the side facing the cylindrical portion 513 of the rotor carrier 511 (i.e., on the radially outer side), a rotor core (or back yoke) that is formed by laminating a plurality of magnet steel sheets in the axial direction. That is, it is possible to employ a configuration where a rotor core is arranged radially inside the cylindrical portion 513 of the rotor carrier 511 and the permanent magnets (i.e., the magnets 91 and 92) are arranged radially inside the rotor core.

As shown in FIG. 47, in an outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 513 of the rotor carrier 511, there are formed a plurality of recesses 513 a that each extend in the axial direction and are spaced at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. The recesses 513 a may be formed by, for example, press working. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 52, on the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 513 of the rotor carrier 511, there are formed a plurality of protrusions 513 b each of which is located in radial alignment with one of the recesses 513 a. On the other hand, in an outer circumferential surface of the magnet unit 512, there are formed a plurality of recesses 512 a conforming to the protrusions 513 b of the cylindrical portion 513 of the rotor carrier 511. Each of the protrusions 513 b is fitted in one of the recesses 512 a, thereby suppressing circumferential displacement of the magnet unit 512. That is, the protrusions 513 b of the rotor carrier 511 together function as a rotation stopper of the magnet unit 512. In addition, the protrusions 513 b may be formed by any suitable method such as the aforementioned press working.

In FIG. 52, the directions of magnet magnetic paths in the magnet unit 512 are indicated with arrows. The magnet magnetic paths extend in arc shapes across the q-axis at the boundaries between the magnetic poles. Moreover, at the d-axis representing the centers of the magnetic poles, the magnet magnetic paths are oriented to be parallel to or near parallel to the d-axis. In an inner circumferential surface of the magnet unit 512, there are formed a plurality of recesses 512 b each of which is located at one of circumferential positions corresponding to the d-axis. In this case, in the magnet unit 512, the lengths of the magnet magnetic paths on the closer side to the stator 520 (i.e., the lower side in the figure) are different from those on the further side from the stator 520 (i.e., the upper side in the figure). More specifically, the lengths of the magnet magnetic paths on the closer side to the stator 520 are shorter than those on the further side from the stator 520. The recesses 512 b are formed at those locations in the magnet unit 512 where the magnet magnetic paths become shortest. That is, in consideration of the fact that it is difficult to generate sufficient magnet magnetic flux at those locations in the magnet unit 512 where the magnet magnetic paths are short, the magnets are cut off at those locations where the magnet magnetic flux is weak.

The effective magnetic flux density Bd of the magnets increases with the length of the magnetic circuit through the inside of the magnets. Moreover, the permeance coefficient Pc increases with the effective magnetic flux density Bd of the magnets. With the configuration shown in FIG. 52, it is possible to achieve reduction in the amount of magnetic material used for forming the magnets while suppressing decrease in the permeance coefficient Pc that is an indicator of the effective magnetic flux density Bd of the magnets. In addition, on the B-H coordinate system, the intersection point between the permeance straight-line dependent on the shapes of the magnets and the demagnetization curve represents the operating point; the magnetic flux density at the operating point represents the effective magnetic flux density Bd of the magnets. In the present embodiment, the rotating electric machine 500 is configured to reduce the amount of iron used in the stator 520. With such configuration, the method of setting the magnetic circuit across the q-axis is very effective.

Moreover, the recesses 512 b of the magnet unit 512 can be utilized as air passages extending in the axial direction. Consequently, it is possible to improve the air cooling performance.

Next, the configuration of the stator 520 will be described. The stator 520 includes a stator coil 521 and a stator core 522. FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing the stator coil 521 and the stator core 522 in a state of being separated from each other.

The stator coil 521 is substantially hollow cylindrical (or annular) in shape. The stator coil 521 is a multi-phase coil comprised of a plurality of phase windings. The stator core 522 is assembled, as a base member, to the radially inner periphery of the stator coil 521. More particularly, in the present embodiment, the stator coil 521 is a three-phase coil comprised of U, V and W phase windings. Each phase winding is constituted of two radially-stacked layers of electrical conductors 523. Similar to the stator 50 described in the first embodiment, the stator 520 according to the present embodiment also has both a slot-less structure and a flat conductor structure. That is, the stator 520 has a configuration that is the same as or similar to the configuration of the stator 50 shown in FIGS. 8-16.

The configuration of the stator core 522 is similar to the configuration of the stator core 52 described in the first embodiment. Specifically, the stator core 522 is formed by laminating a plurality of magnetic steel sheets in the axial direction. The stator core 522 has a hollow cylindrical shape with a predetermined radial thickness. The stator coil 521 is assembled to the radially outer periphery (i.e., the rotor 510-side periphery) of the stator core 522. The outer circumferential surface of the stator core 522 is a smooth cylindrical surface. After the assembly of the stator 520, the electrical conductors 523 forming the stator coil 521 are arranged on the outer circumferential surface of the stator core 522 in alignment with each other in the circumferential direction. In addition, the stator core 522 functions as a back core.

Moreover, the stator 520 may have any of the following configurations (A)-(C).

(A) In the stator 520, inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductors 523 in the circumferential direction. The inter-conductor members are formed of a magnetic material satisfying the following relationship: Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wt is the circumferential width of the inter-conductor members per magnetic pole, Bs is the saturation flux density of the inter-conductor members, Wm is the circumferential width of the magnet unit 512 per magnetic pole and Br is the residual flux density of the magnet unit 512.

(B) In the stator 520, inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductors 523 in the circumferential direction. The inter-conductor members are formed of a nonmagnetic material.

(C) In the stator 520, no inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductors 523 in the circumferential direction.

With any of the above configurations, the inductance of the stator 520 can be lowered in comparison with a conventional stator where teeth of a stator core are interposed between the circumferentially adjacent electrical conductor sections of the stator coil to form magnetic paths. More specifically, the inductance of the stator 520 can be lowered to be lower than or equal to 1/10 of the inductance of the conventional stator. Moreover, with the lowering of the inductance, the impedance of the stator 520 can also be lowered, thereby increasing the torque of the rotating electric machine 500 and thus the output power of the rotating electric machine 500 with respect to the input power. Consequently, the rotating electric machine 500 can output more power than a rotating electric machine which includes an IPM (Interior Permanent Magnet) rotor and outputs torque by utilizing a voltage of an impedance component (in other words, utilizing reluctance torque).

In the present embodiment, the stator coil 521 is molded together with the stator core 522 by a molding material (or insulating member) that is implemented by a resin or the like. Consequently, the molding material is interposed between the circumferentially adjacent electrical conductors 523. That is, the stator 520 according to the present embodiment has the configuration (B) among the aforementioned configurations (A)-(C). In addition, the electrical conductors 523 are arranged so that circumferential side surfaces of circumferentially adjacent electrical conductors 523 abut one another or face one another with minute gaps formed therebetween. Therefore, the stator 520 may alternatively have the above configuration (C). On the other hand, in the case of employing the above configuration (A), protrusions may be formed on the outer circumferential surface of the stator core 522 according to the orientation of the electrical conductors 523 with respect to the axial direction, i.e., according to the skew angles when the stator coil 521 has a skew structure.

Next, the configuration of the stator coil 521 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b). In addition, FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are each a developed view of the stator coil 521 on a plane. FIG. 54(a) shows the electrical conductors 523 located at the radially outer layer while FIG. 54(b) shows the electrical conductors 523 located at the radially inner layer.

In the present embodiment, the stator coil 521 is wound in a distributed winding manner into an annular shape. The electrical conductors 523 forming the stator coil 521 are arranged in two radially-stacked layers. Moreover, the electrical conductors 523 located at the radially outer layer (see FIG. 54(a)) are skewed in a different direction from the electrical conductors 523 located at the radially inner layer (see FIG. 54(b). The electrical conductors 523 are electrically insulated from each other. Each of the electrical conductors 523 may be constituted of a bundle of wires 86 (see FIG. 13). The electrical conductors 523 are arranged in pairs in the circumferential direction; each pair consists of two circumferentially adjacent electrical conductors 523 that belong to the same phase and are energized in the same direction. Every two pairs of electrical conductors 523 (i.e., every four electrical conductors 523), which are located respectively at the radially inner and radially outer layers and in radial alignment with each other, constitute one electrical conductor section. In addition, one electrical conductor section is provided per phase in each magnetic pole.

It is preferable that the radial thickness of each of the electrical conductor sections is set to be smaller than the total circumferential width of the electrical conductor sections per phase in each magnetic pole, thereby realizing a flat conductor structure of the stator coil 521. Specifically, in the stator coil 521, each of the electrical conductor sections may be comprised of a plurality of (e.g., a total of eight) electrical conductors 523 of the same phase which are arranged in two layers in the radial direction and four locations in the circumferential direction. Moreover, on a transverse cross section of the stator coil 521 as shown in FIG. 50, the circumferential width of each electrical conductor 523 may be set to be larger than the radial thickness of each electrical conductor 523. In addition, the stator coil 521 according to the present embodiment may alternatively have the same configuration as the stator coil 51 shown in FIG. 12. However, in this case, it is necessary to secure in the rotor carrier 511 a space for receiving a coil end of the stator coil.

In the stator coil 521, the electrical conductors 523 are arranged in the circumferential direction so that in the coil side part 525 of the stator coil 521 which radially overlaps the stator core 522, each of the electrical conductors 523 extends obliquely at a predetermined angle with respect to the axial direction. Moreover, the stator coil 521 is reversed (or folded back) axially inward at the two coil ends 526 of the stator coil 521, which are located axially outside the stator core 522, so as to realize continuous connection of the electrical conductors 523. In addition, the axial ranges of the coil side part 525 and coil ends 526 of the stator coil 521 are shown in FIG. 54(a). The electrical conductors 523 located at the radially inner layer and the electrical conductors 523 located at the radially outer layer are connected with one another at the coil ends 526 of the stator coil 521. Consequently, the locations of the electrical conductors 523 are alternately changed between the radially inner layer and the radially outer layer each time the stator coil 521 is axially reversed (or folded back) at either of the coil ends 526. That is, the stator coil 521 is configured so that for each circumferentially continuous (or connected) pair of the electric conductors 523, the two electrical conductors 523 of the pair are located respectively at the radially inner layer and the radially outer layer and the directions of electric currents flowing respectively in the two electrical conductors 523 of the pair are opposite to each other.

Moreover, in the stator coil 521, two types of skew are performed on each electrical conductor 523 so that the skew angle of axial end parts of each electrical conductor 523 is different from the skew angle of an axial central part of each electrical conductor 523. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55, in each of the electrical conductors 523, the skew angle θs1 of the axial central part is different from, more particularly smaller than the skew angle θs2 of the two axial end parts. Each of the axial end parts of the electrical conductors 523 is defined within an axial range including one of the coil ends 526 of the stator coil 521 and part of the coil side part 525 of the stator coil 521. The skew angle θs1 represents an oblique angle with which the axial central part of each electrical conductor 523 extends obliquely with respect to the axial direction; the skew angle θs2 represents an oblique angle with which the two axial end parts of each electrical conductor 523 extend obliquely with respect to the axial direction. In addition, the skew angle θs1 of the axial central part of each electrical conductor 523 may be set within such a suitable range as to reduce harmonic components of magnetic flux generated by energization of the stator coil 521.

Setting the skew angle θs1 to be smaller than the skew angle θs2, it is possible to increase the winding factor of the stator coil 521 while reducing the sizes of the coil ends 526. In other words, it is possible to secure a desired winding factor while reducing the axial lengths of the coil ends 526, i.e., the lengths by which the coil ends 526 axially protrude from the stator core 522. As a result, it is possible to increase the torque of the rotating electric machine 500 while minimizing the size of the same.

Here, the suitable range of the skew angle θs1 will be described. In the case of the stator coil 521 having X electrical conductors 523 arranged in each magnetic pole, the Xth order harmonic component may be generated by energization of the stator coil 521. X=2×S×m, where S is the number of phases and m is the number of pole pairs. The inventor of the present application have recognized that since the Xth order harmonic component corresponds to the resultant of the (X−1)th order and (X+1)th order harmonic components, the Xth order harmonic component can be reduced by reducing at least one of the (X−1)th order and (X+1)th order harmonic components. Base on this recognition, the inventor has found that the Xth order harmonic component can be reduced by setting the skew angle θs1 within the range of 360°/(X+1) to 360°/(X−1) in electrical angle.

For example, when S=3 and m=2, X=12. In this case, to reduce the twelfth order harmonic component, the skew angle θs1 is set within the range of 360°/13 to 360°/11 in electrical angle. That is, the skew angle θs1 is set within the range of 27.7° to 32.7° in electrical angle.

Setting the skew angle θs1 as above, it is possible to increase the amount of magnet magnetic flux alternating between N and S and crossing the axial central parts of the electrical conductors 523, thereby increasing the winding factor of the stator coil 521.

The skew angle θs2 of the two axial end parts of each electrical conductor 523 is set to be larger than the above-described skew angle θs1 and smaller than 90° in electrical angle. That is, θs1<θs2<90°.

In the stator coil 521, the electrical conductors 523 located at the radially inner layer and the electrical conductors 523 located at the radially outer layer can be connected to one another by welding or bonding ends of the electrical conductors 523 or by bending the electrical conductor material. At one of the two coil ends 526 (i.e., on one axial side) of the stator coil 521, ends of the phase windings of the stator coil 521 are electrically connected to the electric power converter (or the inverter unit 530) via busbars. Therefore, one of the following configurations may be employed where the connection between the electrical conductors 523 at the busbar-side coil end 526 is different from the connection between the electrical conductors 523 at the anti-busbar-side coil end 526.

As the first configuration, at the busbar-side coil end 526, the electrical conductors 523 are connected to one another by welding; at the anti-busbar-side coil end 526, the electrical conductors 523 are connected to one another by a method other than welding, for example by bending the electrical conductor material. At the busbar-side coil end 526, the ends of the phase windings of the stator coil 521 are connected to the busbars by welding. Therefore, connecting the electrical conductors 523 at the busbar-side coil end 526 also by welding, it is possible to perform both the connection of the ends of the phase windings to the busbars and the connection of the electrical conductors 523 at the busbar-side coil end 526 in a single step, thereby improving the productivity.

As the second configuration, at the busbar-side coil end 526, the electrical conductors 523 are connected to one another by a method other than welding; at the anti-busbar-side coil end 526, the electrical conductors 523 are connected to one another by welding. If the electrical conductors 523 are connected to one another by welding at the busbar-side coil end 526, it is necessary to secure sufficient clearances between the busbars and the busbar-side coil end 526 so as to prevent interference between the busbars and the welds formed between the electrical conductors 523. In contrast, with the second configuration, it is possible to reduce the clearances between the busbars and the busbar-side coil end 526. Consequently, it is possible to relax constraints on the axial length of the stator coil 521 and the busbars.

As the third configuration, the electrical conductors 523 are connected to one another by welding at both the coil ends 526. In this case, it is possible to reduce the length of the electrical conductor material; it is also possible to improve the productivity since no bending step is necessary.

As the fourth configuration, the electrical conductors 523 are connected to one another by a method other than welding at both the coil ends 526. In this case, it is possible to minimize the number of welds formed in the stator coil 521, thereby suppressing occurrence of insulation peeling during the welding step.

In the process of manufacturing the annular stator coil 521, it is possible to first form planar band-shaped windings and then roll the planar band-shaped windings into the annular shape. In this case, after forming the planar band-shaped windings, the electrical conductors of the windings may be welded at either or both of the coil ends 526 as necessary. Moreover, in rolling the planar band-shaped windings into the annular shape, a cylindrical jig may be used which has the same outer diameter as the stator core 522. In this case, the planar band-shaped windings are rolled around the cylindrical jig into the annular shape. Alternatively, the planar band-shaped windings may be rolled directly on the stator core 522.

Furthermore, the configuration of the stator coil 521 may be modified as follows.

For example, in the stator coil 521 shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the skew angle of the two axial end parts of each electrical conductor 523 may be set to be equal to the skew angle of the axial central part of each electrical conductor 523.

Moreover, in the stator coil 521 shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), each pair of ends of circumferentially adjacent electrical conductors 523 of the same phase may be connected with a bridging wire that extends perpendicular to the axial direction.

In the stator coil 521, the number of radially-stacked layers of the electrical conductors 523 may be set to 2×n, where n is a natural number. That is, the number of radially-stacked layers of the electrical conductors 523 may be set to other positive even numbers than 2, such as 4 or 6.

Next, the inverter unit 530, which is an electric power conversion unit, will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. 56 is an exploded cross-sectional view of the inverter unit 530. FIG. 57 is another exploded cross-sectional view of the inverter unit 530, where components of the inverter unit 530 are assembled into two subassemblies.

The inverter unit 530 includes an inverter housing 531, a plurality of electrical modules 532 assembled to the inverter housing 531, and a busbar module 533 for electrically connecting the electrical modules 532.

The inverter housing 531 includes a hollow cylindrical outer wall member 541, a hollow cylindrical inner wall member 542 having an outer diameter smaller than an inner diameter of the outer wall member 541 and arranged radially inside the outer wall member 541, and a boss-forming member 543 fixed to one axial end of the inner wall member 542. All of these members 541-543 are formed of an electrically conductive material, such as Carbon Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (CFRP). The inverter housing 531 is formed by assembling the outer wall member 541 and the inner wall member 542 to radially overlap each other and assembling the boss-forming member 543 to one axial end (i.e., the lower end in FIGS. 56 and 57) of the inner wall member 542. The inverter housing 531 in the assembled state is shown in FIG. 57.

To the radially outer periphery of the outer wall member 541 of the inverter housing 531, there is fixed the stator core 522 (see FIGS. 49 and 50). Consequently, the stator 520 and the inverter unit 530 are integrated into one piece.

As shown in FIG. 56, the outer wall member 541 has a plurality of recesses 541 a, 541 b and 541 c formed in an inner circumferential surface thereof. The inner wall member 542 has a plurality of recesses 542 a, 542 b and 542 c formed in an outer circumferential surface thereof. Upon the outer wall member 541 and the inner wall member 542 being assembled to each other, three hollow portions 544 a, 544 b and 544 c are formed between the two members 541 and 542 (see FIG. 57). Of the three hollow portions 544 a-544 c, the center hollow portion 544 b constitutes a cooling water passage 545 through which cooling water flows as a coolant. The remaining two hollow portions 544 a and 544 c are located respectively on opposite axial sides of the hollow portion 544 b (or cooling water passage 545). In each of the hollow portions 544 a and 544 c, there is received one seal member 546 (see FIG. 57). Consequently, the hollow portion 544 b (or cooling water passage 545) is hermetically sealed by the seal members 546 received in the hollow portions 544 a and 544 c. The cooling water passage 545 will be described in more detail later.

The boss-forming member 543 includes an annular end plate 547 and a boss portion 548 that axially protrudes from a radially inner periphery of the annular end plate 547 toward the inside of the inverter housing 531. The boss portion 548 has a hollow cylindrical shape. Referring back to FIG. 51, the inner wall member 542 has an axially opposite pair of first and second ends; the second end is located closer than the first end to the vehicle body. The boss-forming member 543 is fixed to the second end (i.e., the left end in FIG. 51) of the inner wall member 542. In addition, in the wheel 400 shown in FIGS. 45-47, the base plate 405 is fixed to the inverter housing 531 (more specifically, the end plate 547 of the boss-forming member 543 of the inverter housing 531).

The inverter housing 531 is configured to have a double circumferential wall formed around the central axis of the inverter housing 531. Of the double circumferential wall, the radially outer circumferential wall is constituted of both the outer wall member 541 and the inner wall member 542 while the radially inner circumferential wall is constituted of the boss portion 548 of the boss-forming member 543. In addition, in the explanation given hereinafter, the outer circumferential wall constituted of both the outer wall member 541 and the inner wall member 542 will be referred to as the “outer circumferential wall WA1”; the inner circumferential wall constituted of the boss portion 548 of the boss-forming member 543 will be referred to as the “inner circumferential wall WA2”.

In the inverter housing 531, there is formed an annular space between the outer circumferential wall WA1 and the inner circumferential wall WA2. In the annular space, the electrical modules 532 are arranged along the circumferential direction. Moreover, the electrical modules 532 are fixed to the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 by, for example, bonding or screw fastening. In addition, in the present embodiment, the inverter housing 531 corresponds to a “housing member” and the electrical modules 532 correspond to “electrical components”.

On the radially inner side of the inner circumferential wall WA2 (or the boss portion 548), there is received the bearing 560 by which the rotating shaft 501 is rotatably supported. In the present embodiment, the bearing 560 is configured as a hub bearing which is provided in a central part of the wheel 400 to rotatably support the wheel 400. The bearing 560 is axially located so as to radially overlap the rotor 510, the stator 520 and the inverter unit 530. In the rotating electric machine 500 according to the present embodiment, with reduction in the thickness of the magnet unit 512 of the rotor 510 and employment of both the slot-less structure and the flat conductor structure in the stator 520, the radial thickness of the magnetic circuit part is reduced, thereby making it possible to expand the hollow space on the radially inner side of the magnetic circuit part. Consequently, it becomes possible to arrange the magnetic circuit part, the inverter unit 530 and the bearing 560 in radial alignment with each other. In addition, the boss portion 548 constitutes a bearing holding portion that holds the bearing 560 on the radially inner side thereof.

The bearing 560 may be implemented by, for example, a radial ball bearing. The bearing 560 includes an inner ring 561, an outer ring 562 having an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the inner ring 561 and arranged radially outside the inner ring 561, and a plurality of balls 563 arranged between the inner ring 561 and the outer ring 562. The bearing 560 is fixed to the inverter housing 531 by assembling the outer ring 562 to the boss-forming member 543. The inner ring 561 of the bearing 560 is fixed to the rotating shaft 501. In addition, each of the inner ring 561, the outer ring 562 and the balls 563 is formed of a metal material such as carbon steel.

The inner ring 561 of the bearing 560 has a cylindrical portion 561 a for receiving the rotating shaft 501 and a flange 561 b formed at one axial end of the cylindrical portion 561 a so as to extend nonparallel (or perpendicular) to the axial direction. The flange 561 b is configured to abut the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511 from the axially inner side. In a state of the bearing 560 having been assembled to the rotating shaft 501, the rotor carrier 511 is held with its end plate 514 axially sandwiched between the flange 502 of the rotating shaft 501 and the flange 561 b of the inner ring 561 of the bearing 560. The angles made by the flange 502 of the rotating shaft 501 and the flange 561 b of the inner ring 561 of the bearing 560 with the axial direction are equal (more particularly, both right angles in the present embodiment).

With the inner ring 561 of the bearing 560 supporting the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511 from the axially inner side, it is possible to keep the angle made by the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511 with the axial direction at a suitable angle, thereby maintaining high parallelism between the magnet unit 512 and the rotating shaft 501. Consequently, though the rotor carrier 511 is configured to radially expand, it is still possible to secure high resistance thereof to vibration.

Next, the electrical modules 532 received in the inverter housing 531 will be described.

The electrical modules 532 are obtained by dividing electrical components, such as semiconductor switching elements and smoothing capacitors, into a plurality of groups and modularizing each of the groups. The electrical modules 532 include switch modules (or power modules) 532A, which include the respective semiconductor switching elements, and capacitor modules 532B each including one smoothing capacitor.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, on the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531, there are fixed a plurality of spacers 549 each having a flat surface. On the flat surface of each of the spacers 549, there is mounted one of the electrical modules 532. More specially, the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531 is a smooth cylindrical surface whereas mounting surfaces of the electrical modules 532 are each a flat surface. Therefore, the spacers 549 each having a flat surface are first arranged on and fixed to the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531 and then the mounting surfaces of the electrical modules 532 are respectively arranged on and fixed to the flat surfaces of the spacers 549.

It is not essential to interpose the spacers 549 between the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531 and the electrical modules 532. For example, as an alternative, the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531 may be constituted of a plurality of flat surfaces to which the electrical modules 532 are respectively directly mounted. As another alternative, the mounting surfaces of the electrical modules 532 may be each formed as a curved surface, thereby allowing the electrical modules 532 to be directly mounted to the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531. As yet another alternative, the electrical modules 532 may be fixed to the inverter housing 531 without abutting the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531. For example, the electrical modules 532 may alternatively be fixed to the end plate 547 of the boss-forming member 543 of the inverter housing 531. As still another alternative, of the electrical modules 532, only the capacitor modules 532B may be fixed to the inverter housing 531 without abutting the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531 while the switch modules 532A are fixed to abut the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542.

In addition, in the case of interposing the spacers 549 between the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531 and the electrical modules 532, the outer circumferential wall WA1 and the spacers 549 together correspond to a “tubular portion”. In contrast, in the case of no spacers 549 being employed, the outer circumferential wall WA1 alone corresponds to the “tubular portion”.

As described previously, in the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531, there is formed the cooling water passage 545 through which cooling water flows as a coolant. Consequently, the electrical modules 532 can be cooled by the cooling water flowing through the cooling water passage 545. In addition, as the coolant, cooling oil may be employed instead of cooling water. The cooling water passage 545 is formed over the entire circumference of the outer circumferential wall WA1 into an annular shape. Cooling water flows in the cooling water passage 545 from the upstream side to the downstream side, cooling the electrical modules 532. In the present embodiment, the cooling water passage 545 is annular-shaped and arranged to radially overlap the electrical modules 532 and surround the electrical modules 532 from the radially outer side of them.

In the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531, there are also formed both an inflow passage 571 via which the cooling water flows into the cooling water passage 545 and an outflow passage 572 via which the cooling water flows out of the cooling water passage 545. Specifically, as described previously, in the present embodiment, the electrical modules 532 are fixed to the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542. The electrical modules 532 are arranged in the circumferential direction with gaps formed therebetween. Moreover, one of the gaps formed between the circumferentially adjacent electrical modules 532 is considerably wider than the remaining gaps. In this wider gap, there is arranged a protruding portion 573 of the inner wall member 542 which protrudes radially inward. Both the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 are formed in the protruding portion 573 of the inner wall member 542 in circumferential alignment with each other.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical modules 532 in the inverter housing 531 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. In addition, FIG. 58 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 50.

As shown in FIG. 58, the electrical modules 532 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. The predetermined intervals between the electrical modules 532 include first intervals INT1 and a second interval INT2 that is wider than the first intervals INT1. Each of the predetermined intervals is represented by, for example, a circumferential distance between center positions of one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical modules 532. Moreover, each of the first intervals INT1 is provided between one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical modules 532 between which no protruding portion 573 is interposed. In contrast, the second interval INT2 is provided between the circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical modules 532 between which the protruding portion 573 of the inner wall member 542 is interposed. In addition, the protruding portion 573 is located at, for example, the center of the second interval INT2.

The intervals INT1 and INT2 may be defined on the same circle whose center is on the central axis of the rotating shaft 501. In this case, each of the intervals is represented by the circumferential distance (or the length of arc) on the circle between the center positions of one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical modules 532. Alternatively, each of the intervals may be represented by the angular range θi1 or θi2 between the center positions of one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical modules 532. In this case, θi1 represents the first intervals INT1 while θi2 represents the second interval INT2 (θi1<θi2).

In addition, the first intervals INT1 may alternatively be eliminated (or set to zero). In this case, the electrical components 532 are arranged in the circumferential direction in contact with one another.

Referring back to FIG. 48, in the end plate 547 of the boss-forming member 543 of the inverter housing 531, there is provided a cooling water port 574 where ends of the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 are formed. Both the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 are configured to be included in a cooling water circulation path 575 through which the cooling water circulates. The cooling water circulation path 575 also includes cooling water pipes, a cooling water pump 576 and a heat dissipation device 577. In operation, with the drive of the cooling water pump 576, the cooling water circulates through the cooling water circulation path 575. In addition, the cooling water pump 576 is implemented by an electric pump. The heat dissipation device 577 is implemented by, for example, a radiator configured to dissipate heat of the cooling water to the atmosphere.

As shown in FIG. 50, the stator 520 is arranged on the radially outer side of the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531 while the electrical modules 532 are arranged on the radially inner side of the outer circumferential wall WA1. Consequently, heat generated in the stator 520 is transmitted to the outer circumferential wall WA1 from the radially outer side while heat generated in the electrical modules 532 is transmitted to the outer circumferential wall WA1 from the radially inner side. As a result, the stator 520 and the electrical modules 532 can be cooled at the same time by the cooling water flowing through the cooling water passage 545. That is, it is possible to effectively dissipate heat generated in these components of the rotating electric machine 500.

Next, the electrical configuration of an electric power converter will be described with reference to FIG. 59.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the present embodiment, the stator coil 521 is comprised of the U, V, and W phase windings. An inverter 600 is electrically connected with the stator coil 521. In the inverter 600, there is formed a full bridge circuit having a plurality of pairs of upper and lower arms. The number of pairs of the upper and lower arms is equal to the number of the phase windings of the stator coil 521. The full bridge circuit includes, for each of the U, V and W phases, one serially-connected unit consisting of an upper-arm switch 601 and a lower-arm switch 602. Each of the switches 601 and 602 is turned on and off by a corresponding drive circuit 603, so as to supply alternating current to a corresponding one of the U, V, and W phase windings. Each of the switches 601 and 602 is configured with a semiconductor switching element such as a MOSFET or an IGBT. Moreover, each serially-connected unit, which corresponds to one of the U, V and W phases and consists of one upper-arm switch 601 and one lower-arm switch 602, has a charge supply capacitor 604 connected in parallel therewith to supply electric charge required for the on/off operation of the switches 601 and 602.

Operation of the inverter 600 is controlled by a controller 607. The controller 607 includes a microcomputer which is configured with a CPU and various memories. Based on various types of detected information on the rotating electric machine 500 and power running drive and electric power generation requests, the controller 607 performs energization control by turning on and off the switches 601 and 602 of the inverter 600. More specifically, the controller 607 controls the on/off operation of each of the switches 601 and 602 by, for example, PWM control at a predetermined switching frequency (or carrier frequency) or a rectangular wave control. The controller 607 may be either a built-in controller incorporated in the rotating electric machine 500 or an external controller provided outside the rotating electric machine 500.

In the present embodiment, the electrical time constant of the rotating electric machine 500 is lowered with reduction in the inductance of the stator 520. When the electrical time constant is lowered, it is preferable to increase the switching frequency (or carrier frequency) and the switching speed. In this regard, with the charge supply capacitor 604 connected in parallel with the serially-connected unit of each phase, the wiring inductance is lowered. Consequently, even with the increased switching speed, it is still possible to suitably cope with surge.

The inverter 600 has its high potential-side terminal connected to a positive terminal of a DC power supply 605 and its low potential-side terminal connected to a negative terminal of the DC power supply 605 (or ground). Moreover, between the high potential-side and low potential-side terminals of the inverter 600, there are further connected smoothing capacitors 606 in parallel with the DC power supply 605.

Each of the switch modules 532A includes those components corresponding to one phase which include the upper-arm and lower-arm switches 601 and 602 (i.e., semiconductor switching elements), the drive circuit 603 (more specifically, electrical elements constituting the drive circuit 603) and the charge supply capacitor 604. On the other hand, each of the capacitor modules 532B includes one of the smoothing capacitors 606. FIG. 60 shows a specific configuration example of the switch modules 532A.

As shown in FIG. 60, each of the switch modules 532A includes a module case 611 as a receiving case. In the module case 611, there are received those components corresponding to one phase which include the upper-arm and lower-arm switches 601 and 602, the drive circuit 603 and the charge supply capacitor 604. In addition, the drive circuit 603 is configured as a dedicated IC or circuit board.

The module case 611 is formed of an electrically insulative material such as a resin. The module case 611 is fixed to the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531 with a side surface of the module case 611 abutting the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531. A molding material (e.g., resin) is filled in the module case 611. Moreover, in the module case 611, electrical connection between the switches 601 and 602 and the drive circuit 603 and between the switches 601 and 602 and the charge supply capacitor 604 is made by wirings 612. In addition, each of the switch modules 532A is mounted to the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531 via the corresponding spacer 549. However, for the sake of simplicity, the corresponding spacer 549 is not shown in FIG. 60.

In the state of each of the switch modules 532A being fixed to the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531, the cooling performance in the switch module 532A increases with decrease in the distance from the outer circumferential wall WA1, i.e., with decrease in the distance from the cooling water passage 545. Therefore, in each of the switch modules 532A, the upper-arm and lower-arm switches 601 and 602, the drive circuit 603 and the charge supply capacitor 604 are arranged taking into account the above-described cooling performance therein. More specifically, the amounts of heat generated by these components decrease in the order of the switches 601 and 602, the charge supply capacitor 604 and the drive circuit 603. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, these components are sequentially arranged from the outer circumferential wall WA1 side in the order of the switches 601 and 602, the charge supply capacitor 604 and the drive circuit 603. In addition, the contact surface of each of the switch modules 532A may be smaller than the contactable surface provided in the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531.

In addition, though not shown in the figures, each of the capacitor modules 532B also includes a module case that has the same shape and size as the module cases 611 of the switch modules 532A. In the module case of each of the capacitor modules 532B, there is received one of the smoothing capacitors 606. Similar to the switch modules 532A, the capacitor modules 532B are also fixed to the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531 with a side surface of the module case thereof abutting the inner circumferential surface of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531.

On the radially inner side of the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531, the switch modules 532A and the capacitor modules 532B are not necessarily arranged on the same circle (or at the same radial position). For example, the switch modules 532A may be arranged radially inside or radially outside the capacitor modules 532B.

During operation of the rotating electric machine 500, heat exchange is made between the switch modules 532A and the capacitor modules 532B and the cooling water flowing through the cooling water passage 545 via the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531. Consequently, the switch modules 532A and the capacitor modules 532B are cooled.

Each of the electrical modules 532 may alternatively be configured so that the cooling water flows from the cooling water passage 545 into the electrical module 532, thereby cooling the components of the electrical module 532. FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) together show a first exemplary water-cooling structure of the switch modules 532A. FIG. 61(a) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of one of the switch modules 532A taken along a direction crossing the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531. FIG. 61(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 61B-61B in FIG. 61(a).

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the first exemplary water-cooling structure includes a pair of cooling water pipes 621 and 622 and at least one radiator 623. The cooling water pipe 621 is an inflow pipe via which the cooling water flows from the cooling water passage 545 formed in the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531 into the at least one radiator 623. In contrast, the cooling water pipe 622 is an outflow pipe via which the cooling water flows out of the at least one radiator 623, returning to the cooling water passage 545 formed in the outer circumferential wall WA1. The at least one radiator 623 is provided according to the cooling targets. In the example shown FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), there are provided two radiators 623 that are radially spaced from and aligned with each other. The cooling water is supplied to the radiators 623 via the inflow and outflow cooling water pipes 621 and 622. Each of the radiators 623 is configured to be, for example, hollow inside. It should be noted that each of the radiators 623 may have inner fins formed therein.

In the case of the number of the radiators 623 being equal to two, there are the following three locations in the switch module 532A to arrange the electrical components (i.e., the cooling targets): (1) a location on the outer circumferential wall WA1 side of the radiators 623; (2) a location between the radiators 623; and (3) a location on the opposite side of the radiators 623 to the outer circumferential wall WA1. The cooling performance at these locations decreases in the order of (2), (1) and (3). That is, the cooling performance is highest at the location (2) between the radiators 623 and lowest at the location (3) which is furthest from the outer circumferential wall WA1 (or the cooling water passage 545) and adjoins only one of the radiators 623. Therefore, of the electrical components of the switch module 532A, the switches 601 and 602 are arranged at the location (2); the charge supply capacitor 604 is arranged at the location (1); and the drive circuit 603 is arranged at the location (3). In addition, as an alternative, though not shown in the figures, the drive circuit 603 may be arranged at the location (1) and the charge supply capacitor 604 may be arranged at the location (3).

In any of the above-described cases, in the module case 611, electrical connection between the switches 601 and 602 and the drive circuit 603 and between the switches 601 and 602 and the charge supply capacitor 604 is made by the wirings 612. Moreover, with the switches 601 and 602 interposed between the drive circuit 603 and the charge supply capacitor 604, the extending direction of the wiring 612 that extends from the switches 601 and 602 to the drive circuit 603 is opposite to the extending direction of the wiring 612 that extends from the switches 601 and 602 to the charge supply capacitor 604.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), the pair of inflow and outflow cooling water pipes 621 and 622 are arranged in the circumferential direction (or the flow direction of the cooling water in the cooling water passage 545) so as to be respectively located on the upstream and downstream sides with respect to the flow of the cooling water in the cooling water passage 545. The cooling water flows into the radiators 623 via the inflow cooling water pipe 621 located on the upstream side, and then flows out of the radiators 623 via the outflow cooling water pipe 622 located on the downstream side. In addition, to facilitate the flow of the cooling water into the radiators 623, a flow regulator 624 may be arranged, in the cooling water passage 545, between the inflow and outflow cooling water pipes 621 and 622 in the circumferential direction to regulate the flow of the cooling water through the cooling water passage 545. The flow regulator 624 may be configured to block the cooling water passage 545 or to reduce the cross-sectional area of the cooling water passage 545.

FIGS. 62(a)-62(c) together show a second exemplary water-cooling structure of the switch modules 532A. FIG. 62(a) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of one of the switch modules 532A taken along a direction crossing the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531. FIG. 61(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 62B-62B in FIG. 62(a).

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), in the second exemplary water-cooling structure, the inflow and outflow cooling water pipes 621 and 622 are arranged in the axial direction, more specifically, spaced from and aligned with each other in the axial direction. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 62(c), the cooling water passage 545 is partitioned into two parts that are separated from each other in the axial direction and respectively communicate with the inflow and outflow cooling water pipes 621 and 622. The two parts of the cooling water passage 545 are fluidically connected with each other via the inflow cooling water pipe 621, the radiators 623 and the outflow cooling water pipe 622.

Moreover, the switch modules 532A may alternatively be cooled by the following water-cooling structure.

FIG. 63(a) shows a third exemplary water-cooling structure of the switch modules 532A. In this water-cooling structure, the number of the radiators 623 is reduced to one from two in the example shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b). Consequently, with the single radiator 623, there are the following three locations in the switch module 532A where the electrical components (i.e., the cooling targets) can be arranged: (1) a location on the outer circumferential wall WA1 side of the radiator 623; (2) a location on the opposite side of the radiator 623 to the outer circumferential wall WA1 and immediately adjacent to the radiator 623; and (3) a location on the opposite side of the radiator 623 to the outer circumferential wall WA1 and apart from the radiator 623. The cooling performance at these locations decreases in the order of (1), (2) and (3). Therefore, of the electrical components of the switch module 532A, the switches 601 and 602 are arranged at the location (1); the charge supply capacitor 604 is arranged at the location (2); and the drive circuit 603 is arranged at the location (3).

As described above, in the present embodiment, each of the switch modules 532A is configured to have all of the upper-arm and lower-arm switches 601 and 602, the drive circuit 603 and the charge supply capacitor 604 received in the module case 611. As an alternative, each of the switch modules 532A may be configured to have the upper-arm and lower-arm switches 601 and 602 and only one of the drive circuit 603 and the charge supply capacitor 604 received in the module case 611.

FIG. 63(b) shows a fourth exemplary water-cooling structure of the switch modules 532A. In this water-cooling structure, there are provided two radiators 623 as in the example shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b). Therefore, the switches 601 and 602 are arranged at the location between the radiators 623, where the cooling performance is highest. One of the drive circuit 603 and the charge supply capacitor 604 (i.e., the drive circuit 603 or the charge supply capacitor 604) is arranged at the location on the outer circumferential wall WA1 side of the radiators 623. As another alternative, the switches 601 and 602 and the drive circuit 603 may be integrated into a semiconductor module and the semiconductor module may be arranged at the location between the radiators 623 while the charge supply capacitor 604 is arranged at the location on the outer circumferential wall WA1 side of the radiators 623.

In addition, in the fourth exemplary water-cooling structure shown in FIG. 63(b), the charge supply capacitor 604 may be provided at either or both of the location on the outer circumferential wall WA1 side of the radiators 623 and the location on the opposite side of the radiators 623 to the outer circumferential wall WA1.

In the present embodiment, of the electrical modules 532, only the switch modules 532A have a water-cooling structure formed therein. However, similar to the switch modules 532A, the capacitor modules 532B may also have a water-cooling structure formed therein.

Moreover, each of the electrical modules 532 may be arranged to have its outer surface directly exposed to the cooling water, thereby being cooled by the cooling water. For example, as shown in FIG. 64, each of the electrical modules 532 may be embedded into the outer circumferential wall WA1 to have its outer surface directly exposed to the cooling water flowing through the cooling water passage 545. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 64, only part of each of the electrical modules 532 is immersed in the cooling water. As an alternative, the radial dimension of the cooling water passage 545 may be increased to have the whole of each of the electrical modules 532 immersed in the cooling water. Furthermore, fins may be provided in the immersed module case 611 (or immersed part of the module case 611) of each of the electrical modules 532, thereby further improving the cooling performance.

In the present embodiment, the electrical modules 532 include the switch modules 532A and the capacitor modules 532B as described above. However, the amount of heat generated by the switch modules 532A is different from the amount of heat generated by the capacitor modules 532B. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the electrical modules 532 in the inverter housing 531 taking into account the above fact.

For example, as shown in FIG. 65, all of the switch modules 532A may be arranged adjacent to one another in the circumferential direction and located on the upstream side of the cooling water passage 545, i.e., on the closer side to the inflow passage 571. In this case, the cooling water flowing into the cooling water passage 545 from the inflow passage 571 first cools the switch modules 532A and then cools the capacitor modules 532B located on the downstream side. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 65, in each of the switch modules 532, the inflow and outflow cooling water pipes 621 and 622 are spaced from and aligned with each other in the axial direction as in the example shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b). As an alternative, the inflow and outflow cooling water pipes 621 and 622 may be spaced from and aligned with each other in the circumferential direction as in the example shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b).

Next, electrical connection between the electrical modules 532 and the busbar module 533 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66-68. In addition, FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 66-66 in FIG. 49. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 67-67 in FIG. 49. FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the busbar module 533.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the inverter housing 531, at a location circumferentially adjacent to the protruding portion 573 of the inner wall member 542 of the inverter housing 531 (i.e., the protruding portion 573 where both the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 are formed), three switch modules 532A are arranged adjacent to one another in the circumferential direction. Following the switch modules 532A, six capacitor modules 532B are arranged adjacent to one another in the circumferential direction. More specifically, the space radially inside the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531 is equally divided into ten (i.e., the number of the electrical modules+1) regions in the circumferential direction. Of the ten regions, each of nine regions has one of the electrical modules 532 arranged therein; the remaining region has the protruding portion 573 of the inner wall member 542 received therein. In addition, the three switch modules 532A respectively correspond to the U, V and W phases.

Referring again to FIGS. 56 and 57 together with FIG. 66, each of the electrical modules 532 (i.e., switch modules 532A and capacitor modules 532B) has a plurality of module terminals 615 axially extending from the module case 611 thereof. The module terminals 615 are module input/output terminals via which electrical input/output of the electrical module 532 is made. The module terminals 615 are formed to extend from the module case 611 toward the inside of the rotor carrier 511 (or the outside of the vehicle) in the axial direction (see FIG. 51).

Each of the module terminals 615 of the electrical modules 532 is connected with the busbar module 533. The number of the module terminals 615 provided in each of the switch module 532A is different from the number of the module terminals 615 provided in each of the capacitor modules 532B. More particularly, in the present embodiment, the number of the module terminals 615 provided in each of the switch module 532A is equal to four while the number of the module terminals 615 provided in each of the capacitor modules 532B is equal to two.

As shown in FIG. 68, the busbar module 533 has an annular main body 631, three external connection terminals 632 each axially extending from the annular main body 631 so as to be connected to the DC power supply 605 or an external ECU (Electronic Control Unit), and three winding connection terminals 633 to be respectively connected to the phase windings of the stator coil 521. In addition, the busbar module 533 corresponds to a “terminal module”.

The annular main body 631 is located radially inside the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531 and on one axial side of the electrical modules 532. The annular main body 631 includes an annular insulating member formed of an electrically insulative material (e.g., resin) and a plurality of busbars embedded in the insulating member. The busbars are connected with the module terminals 615 of the electrical modules 532, the external connection terminals 632 and the phase windings of the stator coil 521. The configuration of the busbars will be described in detail later.

The external connection terminals 632 include a high potential-side power terminal 632A connected to the positive terminal of the DC power supply 605, a low potential-side power terminal 632B connected to the negative terminal of the DC power supply 605, and a signal terminal 632C connected to the external ECU. The external connection terminals 632 (i.e., 632A-632C) are arranged in alignment with each other in the circumferential direction and extend in the axial direction on the radially inner side of the annular main body 631. As shown in FIG. 51, after the assembly of the inverter unit 530, each of the external connection terminals 632 has one end axially protruding from the end plate 547 of the boss-forming member 543 of the inverter housing 531. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the end plate 547 of the boss-forming member 543, there are formed insertion holes 547 a. Each of the insertion holes 547 a has a hollow cylindrical grommet 635 inserted therein. The external connection terminals 632 extend respectively through the insertion holes 547 a with the respective grommets 635 inserted therein. In addition, the grommets 635 function as hermetic connectors.

The winding connection terminals 633 are formed to extend from the annular main body 631 radially outward, so as to be respectively connected to ends of the phase windings of the stator coil 521. The winding connection terminals 633 include a U-phase winding connection terminal 633U connected to one end of the U-phase winding of the stator coil 521, a V-phase winding connection terminal 633V connected to one end of the V-phase winding of the stator coil 521, and a W-phase winding connection terminal 633W connected to one end of the W-phase winding of the stator coil 521. Moreover, current sensors 634 (see FIG. 70) may be provided to detect electric currents (i.e., U-phase current, V-phase current and W-phase current) respectively flowing through the winding connection terminals 633 and the phase windings of the stator coil 521.

In addition, the current sensors 634 may be arranged outside the electrical modules 532 and close to the respect winding connection terminals 633, or arranged inside the electrical modules 532.

Hereinafter, electrical connection between the electrical modules 532 and the busbar module 533 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. 69 is a developed view of the electrical modules 532 on a plane illustrating electrical connection between the electrical modules 532 and the busbar module 533. FIG. 70 is a schematic view illustrating electrical connection between the electrical modules 532, which are arranged in an annular shape, and the busbar module 533. In addition, in FIG. 69, electric power transmission paths are shown with solid lines while signal transmission paths are shown with one-dot chain lines. On the other hand, in FIG. 70, only the electric power transmission paths are shown with solid lines, omitting the signal transmission paths.

The busbar module 533 includes a first busbar 641, a second busbar 642 and three third busbars 643 as electric power transmission busbars. The first busbar 641 is connected with the high potential-side power terminal 632A. The second busbar 642 is connected with the low potential-side power terminal 632B. The three third busbars 643 are respectively connected with the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase winding connection terminals 633U, 633V and 633W.

It is particularly easy for heat to be generated in the winding connection terminals 633 and the third busbars 643 by operation of the rotating electric machine 500. Therefore, a terminal block (not shown) may be provided between the winding connection terminals 633 and the third busbars 643 and arranged to abut the inverter housing 531 that has the cooling water passage 545 formed therein. Alternatively, the winding connection terminals 633 and the third busbars 643 may be crank-shaped and arranged to abut the inverter housing 531 that has the cooling water passage 545 formed therein.

With either of the above configurations, it is possible to dissipate heat generated in the winding connection terminals 633 and the third busbars 643 to the cooling water flowing through the cooling water passage 545.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 70, each of the first busbar 641 and the second busbar 642 is annular-shaped. However, each of the first busbar 641 and the second busbar 642 may have other shapes, such as a substantially C-shape with two separate circumferential ends. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase winding connection terminals 633U, 633V and 633W are respectively connected to the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase switch modules 532A via the third busbars 643. As an alternative, the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase winding connection terminals 633U, 633V and 633W may be respectively directly connected to the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase switch modules 532A (more specifically, to the corresponding module terminals 615), omitting the third busbars 643.

On the other hand, each of the switch modules 532A has four module terminals 615, i.e., a positive terminal, a negative terminal, a winding connection terminal and a signal terminal. The positive terminal is connected to the first busbar 641. The negative terminal is connected to the second busbar 642. The winding connection terminal is connected to a corresponding one of the third busbars 643.

Moreover, the busbar module 533 further includes three fourth busbars 644 as signal transmission busbars. The signal terminals of the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase switch modules 532A are respectively connected to the three fourth busbars 644, and all of the fourth busbars 644 are connected to the signal terminal 632C.

In the present embodiment, control signals are inputted from the external ECU to the switch modules 532A via the signal terminal 632C. Consequently, the switches 601 and 602 of the switch modules 532A are turned on and off according to the control signals inputted via the signal terminal 632C. That is, in the present embodiment, the external ECU corresponds to the controller 607 shown in FIG. 59. Therefore, the switch modules 532A are connected to the signal terminal 632C without any built-in controller of the rotating electric machine 500 connected therebetween. As an alternative, it is possible to employ a controller built in the rotating electric machine 500 and have control signals inputted from the built-in controller to the switch modules 532A. This alternative configuration is shown in FIG. 71.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 71, the rotating electric machine 500 includes a control substrate 651 on which a controller 652 is mounted. The controller 652 is connected with each of the switch modules 532A as well as with the signal terminal 632C. The controller 652 receives a command signal from an external ECU, which is an upper-level control apparatus, via the signal terminal 632C; the command signal is indicative of a command on power running drive or electric power generation. Then, according to the command signal, the controller 652 generates and outputs controls signals (or operation signals) to the switch modules 532A, thereby turning on and off the switches 601 and 602 of the switch modules 532A.

In the inverter unit 530, the control substrate 651 shown in FIG. 71 may be arranged more outside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., closer to the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the busbar module 533. Alternatively, the control substrate 651 may be arranged between the electrical modules 532 and the end plate 547 of the boss-forming member 543 of the inverter housing 531. In addition, the control substrate 651 may be arranged so that at least part of the control substrate 651 overlaps the electrical modules 532 in the axial direction.

Each of the capacitor modules 532B has, as shown in FIG. 69, two module terminals 615, i.e., a positive terminal and a negative terminal. The positive terminal is connected to the first busbar 641. The negative terminal is connected to the second busbar 642.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, in the inverter housing 531, as described previously, the protruding portion 573 of the inner wall member 542 is located between one circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical modules 532. The protruding portion 573 has both the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 formed therein. The external connection terminals 632 are arranged radially adjacent to the protruding portion 573. In other words, the external connection terminals 632 are circumferentially located at the same angular position as the protruding portion 573. More particularly, in the present embodiment, the external connection terminals 632 are located radially inside the protruding portion 573. Moreover, when viewed from the inside of the vehicle, the cooling water port 574 and the external connection terminals 632 are located in radial alignment with each other on the end plate 547 of the boss-forming member 543 of the inverter housing 531 (see FIG. 48).

By arranging the protruding portion 573 and the external connection terminals 632 in circumferential alignment with the electrical modules 532 as above, it becomes possible to minimize the size of the inverter unit 530 and thus the size of the entire rotating electric machine 500.

Referring back to FIGS. 45 and 47, the cooling water piping H2 is connected to the cooling water port 574 while the electrical wiring H1 is connected to the external connection terminals 632. In this connected state, both the electrical wiring H1 and the cooling water piping H2 are received in the receiving duct 440. In the inverter housing 531 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, at a location circumferentially adjacent to the external connection terminals 632, the three switch modules 532A are arranged adjacent to one another in the circumferential direction. Further, following the switch modules 532A, the six capacitor modules 532B are arranged adjacent to one another in the circumferential direction. As an alternative, the three switch modules 532A may be arranged at a location furthest from the external connection terminals 632, i.e., at a location on the opposite side of the rotating shaft 501 to the external connection terminals 632. As another alternative, the switch modules 532A may be arranged in a distributed manner such that each of the switch modules 532A is interposed between one pair of the capacitor modules 532B in the circumferential direction.

Arranging the switch modules 532A at the location furthest from the external connection terminals 632 (i.e., at the location on the opposite side of the rotating shaft 501 to the external connection terminals 632), it is possible to suppress malfunction due to mutual inductance between the external connection terminals 632 and the switch modules 532A.

Next, the configuration of a resolver 660, which is provided as a rotation angle sensor in the rotating electric machine 500, will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 49-51, in the present embodiment, the resolver 660 is arranged in the inverter housing 531 to detect the electrical angle θ of the rotating electric machine 500. The resolver 660 is, for example, of an electromagnetic induction type. The resolver 660 includes a resolver rotor 661 fixed on the rotating shaft 501 and a resolver stator 662 that is arranged radially outside the resolver rotor 661 to face the resolver rotor 661. The resolver rotor 661 is annular plate-shaped and has the rotating shaft 501 inserted therein so as to be coaxial with the rotating shaft 501. The resolver stator 662 includes an annular stator core 663 and a stator coil 664 wound on a plurality of teeth formed in the stator core 663. The stator coil 664 is comprised of an excitation coil corresponding to one phase and a pair of output coils respectively corresponding to two phases.

The excitation coil of the stator coil 664 is excited, by an excitation signal in the form of a sine wave, to generate magnetic flux that crosses the output coils. The relationship of relative arrangement between the excitation coil and the output coils cyclically changes with the rotation angle of the resolver rotor 661 (i.e., the rotation angle of the rotating shaft 501). Accordingly, the amount of magnetic flux generated by the excitation coil and crossing the output coils also cyclically changes with the rotation angle of the resolver rotor 661. In the present embodiment, the excitation coil and the output coils are arranged so that voltages generated respectively in the output coils are offset in phase from each other by π/2. Consequently, the output voltages of the output coils are in the form of modulated waves that are obtained by modulating the excitation signal respectively with modulating waves of sin θ and cos θ. More specifically, the modulated waves can be respectively represented by (sin θ×sin Ωt) and (cos θ×sin Ωt), where sin Ωt represents the excitation signal.

The resolver 660 further includes a resolver digital converter. The resolver digital converter calculates the electrical angle θ on the basis of the modulated waves and the excitation signal. The resolver 660 is connected with the signal terminal 632C, and the calculation results of the resolver digital converter are outputted to the external ECU via the signal terminal 632C. In addition, in the case of the rotating electric machine 500 having the built-in controller 652 as shown in FIG. 71, the calculation results of the resolver digital converter are inputted to the built-in controller 652.

Next, the assembly structure of the resolver 660 in the inverter housing 531 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 51, the boss portion 548 of the boss-forming member 543 of the inverter housing 531 is hollow cylindrical-shaped. On the inner circumferential surface of the boss portion 548, there is formed a protrusion 548 a that protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction. The resolver stator 662 is arranged to abut the protrusion 548 a in the axial direction and fixed to the protrusion 548 a by screws or the like. In the hollow space of the boss portion 548, the bearing 560 is arranged on one axial side of the protrusion 548 a while the resolver 660 is arranged on the other axial side of the protrusion 548 a.

Moreover, in the hollow space of the boss portion 548, there is mounted, on the opposite axial side of the resolver 660 to the protrusion 548 a, an annular plate-shaped housing cover 666 to close the receiving space of the resolver 660 (i.e., that part of the hollow space of the boss portion 548 where the resolver 666 is received). The housing cover 666 is formed of an electrically conductive material, such as Carbon Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (CFRP). In a central part of the housing cover 666, there is formed a through-hole 666 a through which the rotating shaft 501 extends. In the through-hole 666 a, there is provided a seal member 667 to block the gap between the inner wall surface of the through-hole 666 a and the outer circumferential surface of the rotating shaft 501. Consequently, the receiving space of the resolver 660 is hermetically sealed by the seal member 667. In addition, the seal member 667 may be implemented by, for example, a sliding seal formed of a resin material.

The receiving space of the resolver 660 is surrounded by the inner circumferential surface of the hollow cylindrical boss portion 548 and closed by the bearing 560 and the housing cover 666 respectively at opposite axial ends thereof. That is, the resolver 660 is enclosed by electrically conductive members. Consequently, it becomes possible to suppress influence of electromagnetic noise on the resolver 660.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, as described previously, the inverter housing 531 has the double circumferential wall consisting of the outer circumferential wall WA1 and the inner circumferential wall WA2 (see FIG. 57). The stator 520 is arranged radially outside the double circumferential wall (i.e., radially outside the outer circumferential wall WA1). The electrical modules 532 are arranged between the outer circumferential wall WA1 and the inner circumferential wall WA2. The resolver 660 is arranged radially inside the double circumferential wall (i.e., radially inside the inner circumferential wall WA2). The inverter housing 531 is formed of an electrically conductive material. Therefore, the stator 520 and the resolver 660 are separated by an electrically conductive partition wall (more particularly, by the electrically-conductive double circumferential wall in the present embodiment). Consequently, it becomes possible to effectively suppress occurrence of magnetic interference between the stator 520 (or the magnetic circuit) and the resolver 660.

Next, the rotor cover 670, which is provided at the open end of the rotor carrier 511, will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 51, the rotor carrier 511 is open at one axial end thereof. The rotor cover 670 is substantially annular plate-shaped and mounted to the open end of the rotor carrier 511. The rotor cover 670 is fixed to the rotor carrier 511 by, for example, welding, bonding or screw fastening. The rotor cover 670 has its inner diameter set to be smaller than the diameter of the inner circumferential surface of the rotor carrier 511, so as to suppress axial displacement of the magnet unit 512. Moreover, the rotor cover 670 has its outer diameter set to be equal to the outer diameter of the rotor carrier 511 and its inner diameter set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the inverter housing 531. In addition, the outer diameter of the inverter housing 531 is equal to the inner diameter of the stator 520.

As described previously, the stator 520 is fixed on the radially outer side of the inverter housing 531. At the joint where the stator 520 and the inverter housing 531 are joined to each other, part of the inverter housing 531 axially protrudes from the stator 520. The rotor cover 670 is mounted to surround the protruding part of the inverter housing 531. Moreover, a seal member 671 is provided between the inner circumferential surface of the rotor cover 670 and the outer circumferential surface of the protruding part of the inverter housing 531, so as to block the gap therebetween. Consequently, the receiving space of the magnet unit 512 and the stator 520 is hermetically sealed by the seal member 671. In addition, the seal member 671 may be implemented by, for example, a sliding seal formed of a resin material.

According to the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the following advantageous effects.

In the rotating electric machine 500 according to the present embodiment, on the radially inner side of the magnetic circuit part which is constituted of the magnet unit 512 and the stator coil 521, there is arranged the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531. Moreover, in the outer circumferential wall WA1, there is formed the cooling water passage 545. Furthermore, on the radially inner side of the outer circumferential wall WA1, there are arranged the electrical modules 532 in the circumferential direction along the outer circumferential wall WA1. With the above configuration, it becomes possible to arrange the magnetic circuit part, the cooling water passage 545 and the inverter 600 (or electric power converter) in a radially stacked manner, thereby realizing efficient part arrangement while minimizing the axial length of the rotating electric machine 500. Moreover, it also becomes possible to effectively cool the electrical modules 532 forming the inverter 600. As a result, it becomes possible to realize high efficiency and a small size of the rotating electric machine 500.

In the present embodiment, the electrical modules 532 (i.e., the switch modules 532A and the capacitor modules 532B), which include heat-generating components such as semiconductor switching elements and the capacitors, are arranged in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531. Consequently, heat generated in the electrical modules 532 can be transmitted to the outer circumferential wall WA1 and dissipated by heat exchange in the outer circumferential wall WA1. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively cool the electrical modules 532.

In the present embodiment, in each of the switch modules 532A, the switches 601 and 602 are interposed between the two radiators 623. Moreover, at least one of a location on the opposite side of one of the two radiators 623 to the switches 601 and 602 and a location on the opposite side of the other of the two radiators 623 to the switches 601 and 602, there is arranged the capacitor 604. Consequently, it becomes possible to effectively cool the capacitor 604 while effectively cooling the switches 601 and 602.

In the present embodiment, in each of the switch modules 532A, the switches 601 and 602 are interposed between the two radiators 623. Moreover, the drive circuit 603 is arranged on the opposite side of one of the two radiators 623 to the switches 601 and 602 while the capacitor 604 is arranged on the opposite side of the other of the two radiators 623 to the switches 601 and 602. Consequently, it becomes possible to effectively cool both the drive circuit 603 and the capacitor 604 while effectively cooling the switches 601 and 602.

In the present embodiment, each of the switch modules 532A is configured so that the cooling water flows from the cooling water passage 545 into the switch module 532A, cooling the components (e.g., the switches 601 and 602) of the switch module 532A. Consequently, each of the switch modules 532A can be cooled by the cooling water flowing in the switch module 532A as well as by the cooling water flowing in the cooling water passage 545. As a result, it becomes possible to more effectively cool each of the switch modules 532A.

In the present embodiment, the cooling water flows into the cooling water passage 545 via the inflow passage 571, and flows out of the cooling water passage 545 via the outflow passage 572. Moreover, in the cooling water passage 545, the switch modules 532A are arranged on the upstream side closer to the inflow passage 571 while the capacitor modules 532B are arranged on the downstream side closer to the outflow passage 572. With the above arrangement, since the temperature of the cooling water flowing through the cooling water passage 545 is lower on the upstream side than on the downstream side, it is possible to preferentially cool the switch modules 532A.

In the present embodiment, one of the intervals between the circumferentially adjacent electrical modules 532 (i.e., the second interval INT2) is set to be wider than the remaining intervals (i.e., the first intervals INT1). In this wider interval, there is arranged the protruding portion 573 of the inner wall member 542 which has both the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 formed therein. Consequently, it becomes possible to suitably form both the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 on the radially inner side of the outer circumferential wall WA1. More specifically, to improve the cooling performance, it is necessary to secure high flow rate of the cooling water. Accordingly, it is necessary to set the opening areas of the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 to be large. In this regard, with the above arrangement of the protruding portion 573 in the wider interval (i.e., the second interval INT2), it becomes possible to suitably form, on the radially inner side of the outer circumferential wall WA1, both the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 having sufficiently large opening areas.

In the present embodiment, the external connection terminals 632 of the busbar module 533 are arranged, on the radially inner side of the outer circumferential wall WA1, in radial alignment with the protruding portion 573 of the inner wall member 542. That is, the external connection terminals 632 are arranged, together with the protruding portion 573, in the wider interval (i.e., the second interval INT2). Consequently, it becomes possible to suitably arrange the external connection terminals 632 without causing interference between the external connection terminals 632 and the electrical modules 532.

In the rotating electric machine 500 according to the present embodiment, the stator 520 is fixed on the radially outer side of the outer circumferential wall WA1 while the electrical modules 532 are arranged on the radially inner side of the outer circumferential wall WA1. Consequently, heat generated in the stator 520 is transmitted to the outer circumferential wall WA1 from the radially outer side while heat generated in the electrical modules 532 is transmitted to the outer circumferential wall WA1 from the radially inner side. As a result, the stator 520 and the electrical modules 532 can be cooled at the same time by the cooling water flowing through the cooling water passage 545. That is, it is possible to effectively dissipate heat generated in these components of the rotating electric machine 500.

In the rotating electric machine 500 according to the present embodiment, the electrical modules 532 arranged on the radially inner side of the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531 and the stator coil 521 arranged on the radially outer side of the outer circumferential wall WA1 are electrically connected via the winding connection terminals 633 of the busbar module 533. Moreover, the winding connection terminals 633 are located axially apart from the cooling water passage 545. Consequently, though there is interposed between the electrical modules 532 and the stator coil 521 the annular cooling water passage 545 formed in the outer circumferential wall WA1, it still becomes possible to suitably connect the electrical modules 532 and the stator coil 521.

In the rotating electric machine 500 according to the present embodiment, torque limitation due to magnetic saturation occurring in the stator core 522 is suppressed by reducing in size or eliminating teeth of the stator core 522 interposed between the circumferentially adjacent electrical conductors 523 forming the stator coil 521. Moreover, torque reduction is suppressed by configuring the electrical conductors 523 to be flat and thin in shape. Furthermore, for the same outer diameter of the rotating electric machine 500, it becomes possible to expand the region radially inside the magnetic circuit part by reducing the radial thickness of the stator 520. Consequently, it becomes possible to suitably arrange, in the expanded region, the outer circumferential wall WA1 in which the cooling water passage 545 is formed and the electrical modules 532.

In the rotating electric machine 500 according to the present embodiment, magnet magnetic flux is concentrated on the d-axis side in the magnet unit 512 and thus the magnet magnetic flux at the d-axis is intensified, thereby achieving torque improvement. Moreover, with reduction in the radial thickness of the magnet unit 512, it becomes possible to further expand the region radially inside the magnetic circuit part. Consequently, it becomes possible to more suitably arrange, in the further expanded region, the outer circumferential wall WA1 in which the cooling water passage 545 is formed and the electrical modules 532.

In addition, it also becomes possible to suitably arrange, in the expanded region radially inside the magnetic circuit part, the bearing 560 and the resolver 660.

In the present embodiment, the rotating electric machine 500 is used, as an in-wheel motor, in the vehicle wheel 400. The wheel 400 is mounted to the vehicle body via the base plate 405, which is fixed to the inverter housing 531, and a mounting mechanism such as the suspension apparatus. With reduction in the size of the rotating electric machine 500, it becomes possible to reduce the space required for mounting the wheel 400 to the vehicle body. Consequently, it becomes possible to expand the arrangement region of other components of the vehicle, such as the battery, and/or expand the vehicle compartment space.

Hereinafter, modifications of the in-wheel motor will be described.

(First Modification of In-Wheel Motor)

In the rotating electric machine 500 according to the previous embodiment, the electrical modules 532 and the busbar module 533 are arranged on the radially inner side of the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531 while the stator 520 is arranged on the radially outer side of the outer circumferential wall WA1. Moreover, the winding connection terminals 633 of the busbar module 533 radially extend across the outer circumferential wall WA1 to connect the busbar module 533 to the phase windings of the stator coil 521. In the rotating electric machine 500, the relative position of the busbar module 533 to the electrical modules 532 may be arbitrarily set. Moreover, the location of guiding winding connection members (e.g., the winding connection terminals 633) may also be arbitrarily set.

For example, regarding the relative position of the busbar module 533 to the electrical modules 532, either of the following arrangements may be employed:

(α1) arranging the busbar module 533 in the axial direction more outside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., closer to the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532; or

(α2) arranging the busbar module 533 in the axial direction more inside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., further from the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532.

On the other hand, regarding the location of guiding the winding connection members, either of the following arrangements may be employed:

(β1) arranging the winding connection members to be guided at a location more outside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., closer to the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532; or

(β2) arranging the winding connection members to be guided at a location more inside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., further from the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532.

Hereinafter, four arrangement examples of the electrical modules 532, the busbar module 533 and the winding connection members will be described with reference to FIGS. 72(a)-72(d). In FIGS. 72(a)-72(d), the reference numeral 637 designates the winding connection members connecting the busbar module 533 to the phase windings of the stator coil 521. The winding connection members 637 correspond to the winding connection terminals 633 described in the previous embodiment. In addition, in each of FIGS. 72(a)-72(d), the vertically upper side corresponds to the outside of the vehicle while the vertically lower side corresponds to the inside of the vehicle.

In the example shown in FIG. 72(a), regarding the relative position of the busbar module 533 to the electrical modules 532, the above arrangement (α1) is employed; regarding the location of guiding the winding connection members 637, the above arrangement (β1) is employed. That is, in this example, both the connection between the electrical modules 532 and the busbar module 533 and the connection between the stator coil 521 and the busbar module 533 are made at a location more outside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., closer to the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532. In addition, this example corresponds to the configuration of the rotating electric machine 500 shown in FIG. 49.

According to the example shown in FIG. 72(a), it is possible to provide the cooling water passage 545 in the outer circumferential wall WA1 without the necessity of considering interference with the winding connection members 637. Moreover, it is also possible to easily connect the stator coil 521 and the busbar module 533 with the winding connection members 637.

In the example shown in FIG. 72(b), regarding the relative position of the busbar module 533 to the electrical modules 532, the above arrangement (α1) is employed; regarding the location of guiding the winding connection members 637, the above arrangement (β2) is employed. That is, in this example, the connection between the electrical modules 532 and the busbar module 533 is made at a location more outside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., closer to the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532, while the connection between the stator coil 521 and the busbar module 533 is made at a location more inside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., further from the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532.

According to the example shown in FIG. 72(b), it is possible to provide the cooling water passage 545 in the outer circumferential wall WA1 without the necessity of considering interference with the winding connection members 637.

In the example shown in FIG. 72(c), regarding the relative position of the busbar module 533 to the electrical modules 532, the above arrangement (α2) is employed; regarding the location of guiding the winding connection members 637, the above arrangement (β1) is employed. That is, in this example, the connection between the electrical modules 532 and the busbar module 533 is made at a location more inside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., further from the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532, while the connection between the stator coil 521 and the busbar module 533 is made at a location more outside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., closer to the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532.

In the example shown in FIG. 72(d), regarding the relative position of the busbar module 533 to the electrical modules 532, the above arrangement (α2) is employed; regarding the location of guiding the winding connection members 637, the above arrangement (β2) is employed. That is, in this example, both the connection between the electrical modules 532 and the busbar module 533 and the connection between the stator coil 521 and the busbar module 533 are made at a location more inside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., further from the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 72(c) and 72(d), when electrical components (e.g., a fan motor) are added to the rotating electric machine 500, with the busbar module 533 arranged more inside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., further from the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532, it is easy to perform the wiring of the added electrical components. Moreover, the distance between the busbar module 533 and the resolver 660 is shortened, thereby facilitating the wiring therebetween.

(Second Modification of In-Wheel Motor)

In the rotating electric machine 500 according to the previous embodiment, the rotating shaft 501, the rotor carrier 511 and the inner ring 561 of the bearing 560 together constitute a rotating body that rotates during operation of the rotating electric machine 500. Moreover, the resolver rotor 661, which is annular plate-shaped, is mounted to the rotating body as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50. In this modification, alternative mounting structures of the resolver rotor 661 to the rotating body will be described with reference to FIGS. 73(a)-73(c).

In each of the mounting structures shown in FIGS. 73(a)-73(c), the resolver 660 is provided in a space enclosed by the rotor carrier 511 and the inverter housing 531, thereby being protected from foreign substances such as water and dust. Moreover, in the mounting structure shown in FIG. 73(a), the bearing 560 has the same configuration as shown in FIG. 49. In contrast, in the mounting structures shown in FIGS. 73(b) and 73(c), the bearing 560 has a configuration different from that shown in FIG. 49 and is located apart from the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511. Furthermore, in each of FIGS. 73(a)-73(c), there are illustrated two alternative locations where the resolver rotor 661 can be mounted. In addition, though not shown in the figures, the resolver stator 662 is fixed to the boss portion 548 of the boss-forming member 543 of the inverter housing 531; the boss portion 548 may be formed to extend to the vicinity of the radially outer periphery of the resolver rotor 661.

In the mounting structure shown in FIG. 73(a), the resolver rotor 661 is mounted to the inner ring 561 of the bearing 560. More specifically, the resolver rotor 661 is mounted to either an axial end face of the flange 561 b of the inner ring 561 or an axial end face of the cylindrical portion 561 a of the inner ring 561.

In the mounting structure shown in FIG. 73(b), the resolver rotor 661 is mounted to the rotor carrier 511. More specifically, the resolver rotor 661 is mounted to either the inner surface of the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511 or the outer circumferential surface of a cylindrical portion 515 of the rotor carrier 511. That is, in this mounting structure, the rotor carrier 511 is configured to further have the cylindrical portion 515 extending from a radially inner edge of the end plate 514 along the rotating shaft 501. In addition, in the case of the resolver rotor 661 being mounted to the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 515, the resolver rotor 661 is located between the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511 and the bearing 560.

In the mounting structure shown in FIG. 73(c), the resolver rotor 661 is mounted to the rotating shaft 501. More specifically, the resolver rotor 661 is mounted to either a portion of the rotating shaft 501 between the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511 and the bearing 560 or a portion of the rotating shaft 501 on the opposite side of the bearing 560 to the end plate 514 of the rotor carrier 511.

(Third Modification of In-Wheel Motor]

The rotating electric machine 500 according to the previous embodiment includes the inverter housing 531 and the rotor cover 670 that are configured as shown in FIGS. 49 and 51. In this modification, alternative configurations of the inverter housing 531 and the rotor cover 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b). The configuration shown in FIG. 74(a) is similar to that shown in FIGS. 49 and 51. On the other hand, the configuration shown in FIG. 74(b) is different from that shown in FIGS. 49 and 51.

Specifically, in the configuration shown in FIG. 74(a), the rotor cover 670, which is substantially annular plate-shaped and fixed to the open end of the rotor carrier 511, is arranged to surround the outer circumferential wall WA1 of the inverter housing 531. That is, the rotor cover 670 is configured to have its inner circumferential surface radially facing the outer circumferential surface of the outer circumferential wall WA1. The seal member 671 is provided between the inner circumferential surface of the rotor cover 670 and the outer circumferential surface of the outer circumferential wall WA1 to block the gap therebetween. Moreover, in the hollow space of the boss portion 548 of the inverter housing 531, there is mounted the housing cover 666 to close the receiving space of the resolver 660. The seal member 667 is provided between the housing cover 666 and the rotating shaft 501 to block the gap therebetween. The external connection terminals 632 of the busbar module 533 penetrate the inverter housing 531 to extend toward the inside of the vehicle (i.e., downward in FIG. 74A).

Furthermore, in the inverter housing 531, there are formed the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572, both of which communicate with the cooling water passage 545, and the cooling water port 574 that includes ends of the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572.

In contrast, in the configuration shown in FIG. 74(b), in the inverter housing 531 (more specifically, the boss-forming member 543 thereof), there is formed an annular protrusion 681 that extends toward the protruding side of the rotating shaft 501 (or toward the inside of the vehicle). The rotor cover 670 is provided to surround the annular protrusion 681 of the inverter housing 531. That is, the inner circumferential surface of the rotor cover 670 and the outer circumferential surface of the annular protrusion 681 radially face each other, with the seal member 671 provided therebetween. Moreover, the external connection terminals 632 of the busbar module 533 first penetrate the boss portion 548 of the inverter housing 531 to extend radially inward (i.e., leftward in FIG. 74(b)) to the hollow space of the boss portion 548 and then penetrate the housing cover 666 to axially extend toward the inside of the vehicle (i.e., downward in FIG. 74(b)).

Furthermore, in the inverter housing 531, there are formed the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 both of which communicate with the cooling water passage 545. The inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 first extend radially inward from the cooling water passage 545 to the hollow space of the boss portion 548 and then extend, via relay passages 682, axially toward the inside of the vehicle (i.e., downward in FIG. 74(b)) penetrating the housing cover 666. In addition, those portions of the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 which protrude outside from the housing cover 666 constitute the cooling water port 574.

With each of the configurations shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b), it is possible to allow the rotor carrier 511 and the rotor cover 670 to suitably rotate relative to the inverter housing 531 while keeping the internal space defined by the rotor carrier 511 and the rotor cover 670 hermetic.

In particular, in the configuration shown in FIG. 74(b), the inner diameter of the rotor cover 670 is reduced in comparison with the configuration shown in FIG. 74(a). Consequently, at a location more inside with respect to the vehicle (i.e., further from the bottom of the rotor carrier 511) than the electrical modules 532, the inverter housing 531 and the rotor cover 670 overlap each other in the axial direction, thereby suppressing occurrence of problems in the electrical modules 532 due to electromagnetic noise. Moreover, with the reduction in the inner diameter of the rotor cover 670, the sliding diameter of the seal member 671 is accordingly reduced, thereby suppressing mechanical loss at the rotational sliding parts.

(Fourth Modification of In-Wheel Motor)

Hereinafter, an alternative configuration of the stator coil 521 will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

As shown in FIG. 75, in this modification, the stator coil 521 is formed of electrical conductors 523 each of which has a rectangular cross section and is wave-wound to have the longer sides of the cross section extending in the circumferential direction. Moreover, in each of the electrical conductors 523, straight portions of the electrical conductor 523, which are included in the coil side part 525 of the stator coil 521, are spaced from each other in the circumferential direction at predetermined intervals; the straight portions are connected with one another by turn portions of the electrical conductor 523 which are included in the coil ends 526 of the stator coil 521. Furthermore, in the coil side part 525 of the stator coil 521, the straight portions of the electrical conductors 523 are arranged to have each facing pair of circumferential side surfaces of the straight portions abutting each other or separated by a minute clearance.

Moreover, in this modification, each of the electrical conductors 523 is radially bent at the coil ends of the stator coil 521. More specifically, each of the electrical conductors 523 is radially bent at right angles to have the turn portions offset radially inward from the straight portions by the radial thickness of the electrical conductors 523. Consequently, it becomes possible to prevent interference between the electrical conductors 523 forming the U-phase, V-phase and W-phase windings of the stator coil 521. In addition, all the straight portions of the electrical conductors 523 have the same axial length.

In assembling the stator core 522 to the stator coil 521 to form the stator 520, the stator coil 521 is first formed in a substantially C-shape to have two circumferential ends separated from each other. After assembling the stator core 522 to the radially inner periphery of the stator coil 521, the separated circumferential ends are joined to each other, thereby transforming the stator coil 521 into an annular shape.

As an alternative, the stator core 522 may be divided in the circumferential direction into a plurality (e.g., three or more) of stator core segments. In assembling the stator core 522 to the stator coil 521 to form the stator 520, the stator core segments may be assembled to the radially inner periphery of the annular-shaped stator coil 521, together constituting the stator core 522.

(Other Modifications)

As shown in FIG. 50, in the rotating electric machine 500 according to the previous embodiment, both the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 of the cooling water passage 545 are together provided at a single location in the circumferential direction. As an alternative, the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 may be respectively provided at two different locations in the circumferential direction. For example, the inflow passage 571 and the outflow passage 572 may be offset from each other by 180° in the circumferential direction. In addition, in the rotating electric machine 500 according to the previous embodiment, there are provided only one inflow passage 571 and only one outflow passage 572. Alternatively, in the rotating electric machine 500, there may be provided a plurality of inflow passages 571 and/or a plurality of outflow passages 572.

In the rotating electric machine 500 according to the previous embodiment, the rotating shaft 501 is configured to protrude outside the wheel 400 on only one axial side of the wheel 400. As an alternative, the rotating shaft 501 may be configured to protrude outside the wheel 400 on both axial sides of the wheel 400. This alternative configuration is particularly suitable for use in the case of the vehicle having only one front wheel and/or only one rear wheel.

The rotating electric machine 500 employed in the wheel 400 is configured as an outer rotor type rotating electric machine. Alternatively, it may be configured as an inner rotor type rotating electric machine.

Third Embodiment

The rotating electric machine 1001 according to the third embodiment is an inner rotor type (inside rotating type) Interior Permanent Magnet (IPM) motor for use in a vehicle. The overall structure of the rotating electric machine 1001 will be described hereinafter with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the rotating electric machine 1001 along a rotating shaft 1002 thereof. FIG. 77 is a transverse cross-sectional view of a rotor 1010 and a stator 1030 of the rotating electric machine 1001 perpendicular to the rotating shaft 1002. In the following explanation, the direction in which the rotating shaft 1002 extends will be referred to as the axial direction; the directions extending radially with the rotating shaft 1002 being the center will be referred to as radial directions; and the direction extending along a circle centering on the rotating shaft 1002 will be referred to as the circumferential direction.

In the third embodiment, in order to eliminate the limitation due to magnetic saturation, the first measure, the second measure, the fourth measure and the fifth measure are taken as described in the first embodiment and the modifications. That is, as the first measure, teeth 1034, which are inter-conductor members, in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole are magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of a magnet unit 700 when a stator coil 1033 is not energized. Moreover, as the second measure, a polar anisotropic structure is employed in which magnet magnetic paths in the magnet unit 700 of the rotor 1010 are lengthened to increase the magnetic force. Furthermore, as the fourth measure, the magnet unit 700 is employed in which magnetic flux density distribution approximate to a sine wave is realized using the polar anisotropic structure. Moreover, as the fifth measure, the stator coil 1033 is designed to have a wire conductor structure in which wires are bundled together. Hereinafter, these measures will be described in detail.

The rotating electric machine 1001 includes the rotor 1010 that is fixed to the rotating shaft 1002, the stator 1030 that is annular-shaped and located to surround the rotor 1010, and a housing 1004 that receives both the rotor 1010 and the stator 1030 therein. The rotor 1010 and the stator 1030 are arranged coaxially with each other. The rotor 1010 is located radially inside the stator 1030 so as to face the stator 1030. A predetermined air gap is formed between an inner circumferential surface of the stator 1030 and an outer circumferential surface of the rotor 1010. The housing 1004 is composed of a pair of cup-shaped housing members 1004 a and 1004 b. The housing members 1004 a and 1004 b are fastened by bolts 1005 into one piece with open ends thereof joined to each other. In the housing 1004, there are provided bearings 1006 and 1007 by which the rotating shaft 1002 and the rotor 1010 are rotatably supported.

As shown in FIG. 77, the rotor 1010 includes a hollow cylindrical rotor core 1011 that has an inner circumferential surface fixed to the rotating shaft 1002. In the rotor core 1011, there are formed a plurality of magnet-receiving holes 1012 in alignment with each other in the circumferential direction. A plurality of magnets 701 (i.e., permanent magnets) are embedded respectively in the magnet-receiving holes 1012. The details of the magnet-receiving holes 1012 the magnets 701 will be described later.

The stator 1030 has a substantially cylindrical stator core 1031 that is formed by laminating a plurality of magnetic steel sheets in the axial direction. In the stator core 1031, there are formed a plurality of slots 1032 that each penetrate the stator core 1031 in the axial direction and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. In the slots 1032, there is wound the stator coil 1033 that is, for example, a three-phase coil. More particularly, in the present embodiment, forty-eight slots 1032 are arranged, according to the number of magnetic poles of the rotor 1010, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to have the three-phase stator coil 1033 received therein. In addition, those portions of the stator coil 1033 which are received in the slots 1032 correspond to electrical conductor groups 800 that are arranged, as electrical conductor sections, at positions facing the rotor 1010 and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

Next, the magnet-receiving holes 1012 of the rotor core 1011 and the magnets 701 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 78. It should be noted that in FIG. 78, there is shown only a part of the rotating electric machine 1001 which corresponds to one of the plurality of magnetic poles (e.g., eight magnetic poles in total) of the rotor 1010.

The rotor core 1011 is formed, by laminating a plurality of magnetic steel sheets in the axial direction, to have a substantially cylindrical shape. The rotor core 1011 has a through-hole 1014 formed in a central part thereof. The rotor core 1011 is fixed to the rotating shaft 1002 by fitting the rotating shaft 1002 into the through-hole 1014. In addition, the magnetic steel sheets forming the rotor core 1011 are fixed together in the axial direction by fixing means such as staking or welding. As shown in FIG. 77, the rotor core 1011 has a d-axis and a q-axis defined therein. The fixing means may be provided in portions of the rotor core 1011 which correspond to q-axis magnetic paths. Moreover, the rotor 1010 and the rotating shaft 1002 may be fixed together by, for example, an adhesive, a concave-convex structure such as a key and a keyway or splines, or press fitting. In addition, the d-axis represents the central axis of magnetomotive force (or magnetic flux) (or represents the centers of the magnetic poles); and the q-axis denotes an axis magnetically orthogonal to the d-axis. In other words, the q-axis represents the boundaries between the magnetic poles, where generally neither the N poles nor the S poles have magnetic flux.

Moreover, at the d-axis positions on an inner circumferential surface 1014 b of the through-hole 1014, there are respectively formed protrusions 1014 a that protrude radially inward to abut an outer circumferential surface of the rotating shaft 1002. The protrusions 1014 a may have a rectangular shape, a trapezoidal shape, a triangular ridge shape or the like. In any case, the rotor core 1011 is configured to: have the protrusions 1014 a formed apart from each other in the circumferential direction on the inner circumferential surface 1014 b of the through-hole 1014 and recesses formed between the protrusions 1014 a; and locally abut, with the protrusions 1014, on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating shaft 1002. In addition, instead of forming the protrusions 1014 a on the inner circumferential surface 1014 b of the through-hole 1014, protrusions may be formed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating shaft 1002.

In the vicinity of an outer circumferential surface of the rotor core 1011 facing the inner circumferential surface of the stator 1030, there are formed the plurality (e.g., eight in the present embodiment) of magnet-receiving holes 1012 that each penetrate the rotor core 1011 in the axial direction and are spaced at a predetermined distance from one another in the circumferential direction. In each part of the rotor core 1011 corresponding to one magnetic pole, i.e., between each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the q-axis positions, there is formed one of the magnet-receiving holes 1012. The magnet-receiving holes 1012 are formed in an arc shape along the circumferential direction and have a uniform radial thickness from the outer circumferential surface of the rotor core 1011 (i.e., the rotor-side circumferential surface) to the magnet-receiving holes 1012. Moreover, each of the magnet-receiving holes 1012 is shaped symmetrically with respect to the d-axis (or to the central axis of the magnetic pole). As mentioned above, in the present embodiment, a total of eight magnet-receiving holes 1012 are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the rotor core 1011.

The magnets 701 are inserted respectively in the magnet-receiving holes 1012. By being inserted respectively in the magnet-receiving holes 1012, the magnets 701 are arranged in alignment with each other in the circumferential direction. Moreover, the magnet unit 700 is formed, by arranging the magnets 701 in alignment with each other in the circumferential direction, to have an annular shape. In addition, each of the magnets 701 is fixed so as to abut the rotor core 1011 via an adhesive. That is, each of the magnets 701 abuts the rotor core 1011 via an ultrathin layer of the adhesive.

As in the first embodiment, each of the magnets 701 is constituted of a permanent magnet. More specifically, each of the magnets 701 is implemented by a sintered magnet whose residual flux density Br is higher than or equal to 1.0[T] and intrinsic coercive force Hcj is higher than or equal to 400 [kA/m]. In other words, the magnet unit 700 is configured so that: the saturation flux density Js is higher than or equal to 1.2[T]; the grain size is smaller than or equal to 10[μm]; and Js×α is higher than or equal to 1.0[T], where α is the orientation ratio. Moreover, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, permanent magnets, whose easy axes of magnetization are controlled by orientation, are employed as the magnets 701. Consequently, it becomes possible to increase the magnetic circuit length inside the magnets 701 in comparison with the magnetic circuit length inside conventional linearly-oriented magnets of 1.0[T] or higher. That is, in the third embodiment, the second measure is also taken as in the first embodiment.

Moreover, the magnets 701 have the easy axes of magnetization thereof oriented such that at locations closer to the d-axis, the directions of the easy axes of magnetization are more parallel to the d-axis than at locations closer to the q-axis; and the magnet magnetic paths are formed along the easy axes of magnetization. As described previously, the d-axis represents the centers of the magnetic poles while the q-axis represents the boundaries between the magnetic poles. In the present embodiment, the magnets 701 also have the polar anisotropic characteristics as described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 9. The polar anisotropic characteristics are such that the easy axes of magnetization (shown with one-dot chain lines in FIG. 78) extend in an arc shape between the d-axis at the center of each of the magnetic poles and the q-axis at the boundary between each adjacent pair of the magnetic poles. Thus, the magnet magnetic paths also extend in an arc shape. That is, in the third embodiment, the fourth measure is also taken as in the first embodiment.

In addition, the configuration shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 which is based on the inner rotor structure is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 9 which is based on the outer rotor structure, except that the magnet unit 700 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 is opposite in radial arrangement to the magnet unit 42 shown in FIG. 9.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths (and easy axes of magnetization) are formed centering at center points set on the q-axis. In addition, the shapes of the magnet magnetic paths (and easy axes of magnetization) may be the shapes of arcs that are each a part of a perfect circle or a part of an ellipse. Moreover, the center points of the arcs are not necessarily set on the q-axis. However, it is preferable for the center points of the arcs to be set closer to the q-axis than to the d-axis. With the above configuration, it becomes possible to make the surface magnetic flux density distribution (or the surface magnetic flux waveform) of the magnet unit 700 sinusoidal in shape as in the first embodiment.

In the magnet unit 700, the magnetization (or polarization) directions of the magnets 701 are changed between the adjacent magnets 701 so that the polarities of the magnetic poles alternately change in the circumferential direction. Moreover, each of the magnets 701 has an arc-shaped cross section perpendicular to the axial direction. That is, each of the magnets 701 has both a radially-outer peripheral surface 702 (i.e., armature-side peripheral surface) and a radially-inner peripheral surface 703 (i.e., non-armature-side peripheral surface) thereof formed in an arc shape along the circumferential direction. On the other hand, at the circumferential ends of each of the magnets 701, there are respectively formed planar end surfaces 704 a and 704 b along the radial direction.

Each of the magnets 701 is provided symmetrically with respect to the d-axis between a circumferentially-adjacent pair of the q-axis positions. Moreover, with the above-described configuration, each of the magnets 701 has a magnetic polarity at each circumferential end thereof. Further, each of the magnets 701 also has, at a circumferential center thereof, a magnetic polarity on the radially-outer peripheral surface thereof. Accordingly, in each of the magnets 701, each of the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 and the circumferential end surfaces 704 a and 704 b constitutes a magnetic flux inflow surface or a magnetic flux outflow surface. The magnetic flux inflow and magnetic flux outflow surfaces may be collectively referred to as the magnetic flux acting surfaces.

In the present embodiment, the stator 1030 has the teeth 1034 as the inter-conductor members between circumferentially-adjacent in-slot portions of the stator coil 1033. The stator 1030 includes a plurality of parts each of which functions as one magnetic pole (N pole or S pole) upon energization of the stator coil 1033. Moreover, the teeth 1034 in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole are magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 when the stator coil 1033 is not energized. That is, the first measure is taken as in the first embodiment. Consequently, the function of the teeth 1034 is disabled and thus the structure of the stator 1030 becomes closer to a toothless structure (or slot-less structure), thereby lowering the inductance of the stator 1030.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the teeth 1034 and the magnet unit 700 are configured to satisfy the following relationship:

Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br  (1)

where Bs is the saturation flux density of the teeth 1034, Wm is the circumferential width of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole and Br is the residual flux density of the magnet unit 700.

The circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole is the circumferential width of a magnetic flux acting surface of each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700; the magnetic flux acting surface is a peripheral surface on the stator side in the radial direction, and is a magnetic flux inflow surface or a magnetic flux outflow surface. In the present embodiment, the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole is represented by the circumferential width of the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of each of the magnets 701 which forms one magnetic pole (see FIG. 78).

In addition, in the case of each magnetic pole being constituted of a plurality of magnets, the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole is represented by the sum of circumferential widths of the stator-side peripheral surfaces of the plurality of magnets. This case will be described in detail later in a modification of the third embodiment.

The total circumferential width Wt of the teeth 1034 provided as the inter-conductor members in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole is represented by the sum of circumferential widths of the teeth 1034 present in the circumferential range Wn in which each part of the stator 1030 functioning as one magnetic pole extends in the circumferential direction. The circumferential range Wn in which each part of the stator 1030 functioning as one magnetic pole extends in the circumferential direction is as described in the first and second modifications with reference to FIGS. 25-27. Moreover, in the present embodiment, the teeth 1034 correspond to the protrusions 142 and the tooth-shaped portions 143 described in the first and second modifications with reference to FIGS. 25-27; and the total circumferential width Wt of the teeth 1034 provided as the inter-conductor members in each part of the stator 1030 functioning as one magnetic pole corresponds to the total circumferential width Wt of the protrusions 142 and the total circumferential width Wt of the tooth-shaped portions 143 described in the first and second modifications with reference to FIGS. 25-27.

That is, the circumferential range Wn is set to include a plurality of circumferentially-adjacent in-slot portions of the stator coil 1033 whose energization periods overlap each other. The references (or boundaries) in setting the range Wn may be preferably set to the centers of the teeth 1034. For example, in the configuration shown in FIG. 78, the circumferential range Wn is set to include four in-slot portions of the stator coil 1033 located closest to the d-axis, which represents the center of the magnetic pole, in the circumferential direction. The ends (start and end points) of the range Wn are respectively set to the centers of the two teeth 1034 between which the four in-slot portions of the stator coil 1033 are located in the circumferential direction.

Moreover, in the configuration shown in FIG. 78, at each end of the range Wn, half of one tooth 1034 is included in the range Wn. Therefore, it can be considered that in the range Wn, there are included a total of four teeth 1034. The total circumferential width Wt of the teeth 1034 provided as the inter-conductor members in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole can be calculated as follows: Wt=Wt1+Wt2+Wt3+Wt4+Wt5. That is, Wt=½A+A+A+A+½A=4A, where A is the circumferential width of each of the teeth 1034.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, three phase windings of the stator coil 1033 are wound in a distributed winding manner. Moreover, the number of the teeth 1034 per magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 is set to (number of phases×Q), where Q is the number of those of the electrical conductors 82 of each phase of the stator coil 1033 which are in contact with an annular back yoke of the stator core 1031. In the case of the electrical conductors 82 being stacked in the radial direction of the rotor 1010 to form the stator coil 1033, Q is equal to the number of those of the electrical conductors 82 of each phase of the stator coil 1033 which are located radially outermost in the stator coil 1033. In this case, when the three phase windings of the stator coil 1033 are energized in a predetermined sequence, in each magnetic pole, the teeth 1034 corresponding to two phases are excited. Accordingly, in the range of each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700, the total circumferential width Wt of the teeth 1034 that are excited by energization of the stator coil 1033 is equal to (number of excited phases×Q×A=2×2×A), where A is the circumferential width of each of the teeth 1034.

Moreover, upon specifying the total circumferential width Wt as above, the teeth 1034 and the magnet unit 700 are configured to satisfy the above relationship (1), where Bs is the saturation flux density of the teeth 1034, Wm is the circumferential width of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole and Br is the residual flux density of the magnet unit 700.

The total circumferential width Wt is also equal to the circumferential width of that portion in each magnetic pole whose relative permeability may become higher than 1. Moreover, giving a margin, the total circumferential width Wt may be determined to be the sum of circumferential widths of all the teeth 1034 in each magnetic pole. More specifically, since the number of the teeth 1034 per magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 is equal to (number of phases×Q), the sum of circumferential widths (i.e., the total circumferential width Wt) of all the teeth 1034 in each magnetic pole may be determined to be (number of phases×Q×A=3×2×A=6A). In addition, in the present embodiment, the stator coil 1033 is wound in the same distributed winding manner as described in the first modification.

The stator coil 1033 may be wound in a concentrated winding manner instead of the distributed winding manner. In the case of the stator coil 1033 being wound in a concentrated winding manner, when the three phase windings of the stator coil 1033 are energized in a predetermined sequence, two of the phase windings are excited at the same time. Consequently, the teeth 1034 corresponding to the two exited phase windings are also excited. Accordingly, in the range of each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700, the total circumferential width Wt of the teeth 1034 that are excited by energization of the stator coil 1033 is equal to (A×2), where A is the circumferential width of each of the teeth 1034. Moreover, upon specifying the total circumferential width Wt as above, the teeth 1034 are formed of a magnetic material satisfying the above relationship (1). In addition, in the present embodiment, the stator coil 1033 may be wound in the same concentrated winding manner as described in the first modification.

In an Interior Permanent Magnet (IPM) motor, unlike in an SPM motor, at least part of the magnetic flux from the magnets 701 may be self-short-circuited via magnetic paths formed in the rotor core 1011, without crossing the stator coil 1033. That is, magnetic flux leakage may occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 are configured, taking into account the magnetic flux leakage, so that the teeth 1034 in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole can be magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 when the stator coil 1033 is not energized.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 are configured to satisfy the following relationship:

Wc×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br  (4)

where Wc is the total width of magnetic paths formed in each part of the rotor core 1011 corresponding to one magnetic pole, Bc is the saturation flux density of the rotor core 1011, Wt is the total circumferential width of the teeth 1034 in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole, Bs is the saturation flux density of the teeth 1034, Wm is the circumferential width of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole and Br is the residual flux density of the magnet unit 700.

In addition, the total circumferential width Wt of the teeth 1034 in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole and the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole in the relationship (4) may be determined as described previously. Hereinafter, the determination of the total width Wc of magnetic paths formed in each part of the rotor core 1011 corresponding to one magnetic pole will be described.

First, magnetic paths formed in each part of the rotor core 1011 corresponding to one magnetic pole will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, in each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700, the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of the magnet 701 constitutes a magnetic flux outflow surface while the circumferential end surfaces 704 a and 704 b of the magnet 701 constitute magnetic flux inflow surfaces; otherwise, the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of the magnet 701 constitutes a magnetic flux inflow surface while the circumferential end surfaces 704 a and 704 b of the magnet 701 constitute magnetic flux outflow surfaces. Moreover, the magnet 701 has almost the same shape as the magnet-receiving hole 1012; and no flux barrier such as an air gap is formed in the magnet-receiving hole 1012. Therefore, the magnet 701 is in contact with the rotor core 1011; thus the magnetic flux of the magnet 701 may be self-short-circuited along magnetic paths that are formed so as to connect the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 and the circumferential end surfaces 704 a and 704 b of the magnet 701.

In the present embodiment, the end surfaces 704 a and 704 b, which are magnetic flux acting surfaces, are located respectively at opposite circumferential ends of the magnet 701. Therefore, in the rotor core 1011, there may be formed both a magnetic path (to be referred to as the first magnetic path hereinafter) connecting the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of the magnet 701 and the end surface 704 a on one side in the circumferential direction and a magnetic path (to be referred to as the second magnetic path hereinafter) connecting the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of the magnet 701 and the end surface 704 b on the other side in the circumferential direction.

The first magnetic path corresponds to a magnetic path formed by detouring around one circumferential end portion of the magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700. The second magnetic path corresponds to a magnetic path formed by detouring around the other circumferential end portion of the magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700.

It is known that the amount of self-short-circuited magnetic flux depends on the widths of the magnetic paths and the saturation flux density of the rotor core 1011. Moreover, for each of the magnetic paths, the width of the magnetic path is represented by the width of a narrowest portion of the magnetic path. Specifically, when any portion of the magnetic path is magnetically saturated, the magnetic flux can no longer be short-circuited via the magnetic path; and the narrowest portion of the magnetic path is the portion where it is easiest for magnetic saturation to occur in the magnetic path. For the above reason, the width of the magnetic path is represented by the width of the narrowest portion of the magnetic path.

As shown in FIG. 78, the width Wc1 of the first magnetic path is represented by the distance from the magnet-receiving hole 1012 to the outer circumferential surface of the rotor core 1011 on one side in the circumferential direction. Similarly, the width Wc2 of the second magnetic path is represented by the distance from the magnet-receiving hole 1012 to the outer circumferential surface of the rotor core 1011 on the other side in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the magnet-receiving hole 1012 is formed symmetrically with respect to the d-axis (or to the central axis of the magnetic pole); thus the distance from the magnet-receiving hole 1012 to the outer circumferential surface of the rotor core 1011 is constant in the circumferential direction. Consequently, Wc1=Wc2.

In the case where a plurality of magnetic paths are formed in each part of the rotor core 1011 corresponding to one magnetic pole, magnetic flux may leak from each of the magnetic paths. Therefore, the total width Wc of the magnetic paths formed in each part of the rotor core 1011 corresponding to one magnetic pole is represented by the sum of widths of the magnetic paths. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the total width Wc is equal to the sum of the width Wc1 of the first magnetic path and the width Wc2 of the second magnetic path, i.e., to (Wc1+Wc2).

Hence, in the present embodiment, the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 are configured to satisfy the following relationship:

(Wc1+Wc2)×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br  (5)

Consequently, it becomes possible to have, taking into account the magnetic flux leakage in the rotor core 1011, the teeth 1034 in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 when the stator coil 1033 is not energized.

As indicated by arrows (i.e., shown with dashed lines) in FIG. 78, magnetic flux may leak from the teeth 1034 in the circumferential direction. Moreover, eddy current loss may occur in the stator coil 1033 when magnetic flux leaks from the teeth 1034 in the circumferential direction and passes through the stator coil 1033. In view of the above, in the present embodiment, the stator coil 1033 is configured as follows.

As shown in FIG. 79, each electrical conductor group 800 of the stator coil 1033 consists of a first electrical conductor 810, a second electrical conductor 820, a third electrical conductor 830 and a fourth electrical conductor 840 (to be simply referred to as the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 hereinafter). Moreover, in each electrical conductor group 800, the four electrical conductors are arranged in radial alignment with each other. FIG. 79 shows an electrical conductor group 800 of one of the U, V and W phases. It should be noted that in FIG. 79, for the sake of simplicity, insulating coats of the electrical conductor group 800 and the teeth 1034 are not shown. Moreover, it also should be noted that in FIG. 79, for the sake of convenience, the stator core 1031 and the like are developed to be straight in shape.

The first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 are each formed to have a rectangular cross section. Moreover, the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 are each constituted of a bundle of a plurality of wires. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, the first electrical conductor 810 is formed by bundling and compressing a plurality (e.g., four in the present embodiment) of wires 811-814 together. The wires 811-814 are connected in series with each other. Similarly, the second electrical conductor 820 is formed by bundling and compressing wires 821-824 together; the third electrical conductor 830 is formed by bundling and compressing wires 831-834 together; and the fourth electrical conductor 840 is formed by bundling and compressing wires 841-844 together. Since the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 have the same configuration, hereinafter, the configuration of the first electrical conductor 810 will be mainly described.

Similar to the wires 86 described in the first embodiment, it is preferable for the wires 811-814 to be each constituted of a bundle of electrically conductive fibers 87. Moreover, the surface of each of the wires 811-814 is covered with a polymer insulating coat PL1, such as an enamel coat. It is preferable that the surface of each of the wires 811-814 is covered with an enamel coat, such as a polyimide coat or an amide-imide coat. Furthermore, the bundle of the wires 811-814 is covered with an insulating coat PL2.

The wires 811-814 of the first electrical conductor 810 are adjacent to one another, and are in contact with one another in some places. In the first electrical conductor 810, the electrical resistances between the wires 811-814 are higher than the electrical resistance of each of the wires 811-814. Specifically, for each adjacent pair of the wires 811-814, a first electrical resistivity in the direction in which the wires adjoin each other is higher than a second electrical resistivity in the longitudinal direction of each of the wires. In addition, the first electrical conductor 810 may be constituted of a wire bundle that is formed by bundling the wires 811-814 together and covering the wires 811-814 with an insulating member having extremely high first electrical resistivity.

Since the first electrical conductor 810 is constituted of the wires 811-814, it becomes possible to suppress generation of eddy current in each of the wires 811-814, thereby reducing eddy current in the first electrical conductor 810. In addition, the method of insulating between the wires 811-814 is not limited to employment of the above-described polymer insulating coat PL1. As an alternative, it may be possible to make it difficult for electric current to flow between the twisted wires 811-814 by increasing the contact resistance therebetween. That is, when the resistance between the wires 811-814 is higher than the resistance of each of the wires 811-814, it is possible to achieve the above effect by virtue of the electric potential difference caused by the resistance difference.

The number and arrangement of the wires 811-814 may be arbitrarily changed. Moreover, the shape of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 may also be arbitrarily changed.

As shown in FIG. 81, the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 are arranged in the corresponding slots 1032 along the circumferential direction, thereby forming a continuous winding of the stator coil 1033. In FIG. 81, as in FIG. 15, the positions where the electrical conductor groups 800 are arranged (i.e., the positions of the corresponding slots 1032) are designated by D1, D7, D13 and D19. In addition, FIG. 81 illustrates the arrangement of the first electrical conductor 810.

As shown in FIG. 81, between the positions D1 and D7, the wires 811-814 are wound a plurality of turns (e.g., four turns in the present embodiment). Similarly, between the positions D13 and D19, the wires 811-814 are also wound a plurality of turns (e.g., four turns in the present embodiment). At each of these positions, the wires 811-814 are bundled together, thereby forming the first electrical conductor 810. In addition, between the positions D7 and D13, corresponding ends of the wires 811-814 are connected to each other. More specifically, an end of the wire 814 located at the position D7 and an end of the wire 811 located at the position D13 are connected to each other. Consequently, all the wires 811-814 are connected in series with each other.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 81, those portions of the wires which extend straight constitute straight portions 83 of the electrical conductors (or the electrical conductor groups 800 as the electrical conductor sections) which face the magnet unit 700. On the other hand, those portions of the wires which are bent to connect circumferentially-adjacent straight portions 83 of the same phase constitute turn portions 84 of the electrical conductors. As above, the straight portions 83 are arranged alternately with the turn portions 84, thereby forming a continuous winding for each phase of the stator coil 1033.

FIG. 79 shows the cross sections of the straight portions 83 of the electrical conductors 810-840 taken at a predetermined axial position LH (see FIG. 81). Specifically, in FIG. 79, there are shown: the cross sections of the straight portions 83 located at a first circumferential position CS1 that corresponds to the position D1 in FIG. 81; the cross sections of the straight portions 83 located at a second circumferential position CS2 that corresponds to the position D7 in FIG. 81; the cross sections of the straight portions 83 located at a third circumferential position CS3 that corresponds to the position D13 in FIG. 81; and the cross sections of the straight portions 83 located at a fourth circumferential position CS4 that corresponds to the position D19 in FIG. 81.

At the first circumferential position CS1, the first electrical conductor 810, the second electrical conductor 820, the third electrical conductor 830 and the fourth electrical conductor 840 are arranged in this order from the inner side in the radial direction. Next, the arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 at the second to the fourth circumferential positions CS2-CS4 will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in each electrical conductor group 800, the relative positional relationship between the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 is maintained at the second to the fourth circumferential positions CS2-CS4.

The arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 constituting the electrical conductor group 800 at the second circumferential position CS2 are set to arrangement positions which are obtained by rotating the arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 constituting the electrical conductor group 800 at the first circumferential position CS1 by 180 degrees in an axial view. In addition, the arrangement positions can be realized by inverting the electrical conductor group 800 by 180 degrees at the coil end (i.e., the turn portions 84 of the electrical conductors) connecting the electrical conductor group 800 located at the first circumferential position CS1 and the electrical conductor group 800 located at the second circumferential position CS2.

The arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 constituting the electrical conductor group 800 at the third circumferential position CS3 are set to arrangement positions which are obtained by rotating the arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 constituting the electrical conductor group 800 at the second circumferential position CS2 by 180 degrees in an axial view. In addition, the arrangement positions can be realized by inverting the electrical conductor group 800 by 180 degrees at the coil end connecting the electrical conductor group 800 located at the second circumferential position CS2 and the electrical conductor group 800 located at the third circumferential position CS3.

The arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 constituting the electrical conductor group 800 at the fourth circumferential position CS4 are set to arrangement positions which are obtained by rotating the arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 constituting the electrical conductor group 800 at the third circumferential position CS3 by 180 degrees in an axial view. In addition, the arrangement positions can be realized by inverting the electrical conductor group 800 by 180 degrees at the coil end connecting the electrical conductor group 800 located at the third circumferential position CS3 and the electrical conductor group 800 located at the fourth circumferential position CS4. Hereinafter, the reason for employing the above-described arrangement positions will be explained.

FIG. 82 illustrates electrical connection between the electrical conductors forming one of the three phase windings of the stator coil 1033. As shown in FIG. 82, the first electrical conductors 810 of the electrical conductor groups 800 circumferentially adjacent to one another are connected in series with each other, forming a first serially-connected unit. That is, the first serially-connected unit consists of the serially-connected first electrical conductors 810 the number of which is equal to the number of the electrical conductor groups 800. Similarly, the second electrical conductors 820 of the electrical conductor groups 800 circumferentially adjacent to one another are connected in series with each other, forming a second serially-connected unit. That is, the second serially-connected unit consists of the serially-connected second electrical conductors 820 the number of which is equal to the number of the electrical conductor groups 800.

The third electrical conductors 830 of the electrical conductor groups 800 circumferentially adjacent to one another are connected in series with each other, forming a third serially-connected unit. That is, the third serially-connected unit consists of the serially-connected third electrical conductors 830 the number of which is equal to the number of the electrical conductor groups 800. Moreover, the fourth electrical conductors 840 of the electrical conductor groups 800 circumferentially adjacent to one another are connected in series with each other, forming a fourth serially-connected unit. That is, the fourth serially-connected unit consists of the serially-connected fourth electrical conductors 840 the number of which is equal to the number of the electrical conductor groups 800. Furthermore, the first to the fourth serially-connected units are connected in parallel to each other, forming a parallel-connected unit. One end of the parallel-connected unit is connected to an inverter, while the other end of the parallel-connected unit is connected to a neutral point of the stator coil 1033. Consequently, a closed-loop circuit is formed in the stator coil 1033. In this case, the following problems may occur.

Upon the magnet magnetic flux of the magnet unit 700 crossing the electrical conductors, electromotive forces are induced in the electrical conductors according to the rate of change in the flux linkage with time. The amounts of the magnet magnetic flux crossing the electrical conductors tend to decrease with increase in the radial distance from the magnet unit 700. Therefore, the closer the electrical conductors are radially located to the magnet unit 700, the larger the amounts of the magnet magnetic flux crossing the electrical conductors become and thus the higher the electromotive forces induced in the electrical conductors become. Moreover, the amounts of the magnet magnetic flux crossing the electrical conductors also vary due to the differences between the circumferential positions of the electrical conductors relative to the magnetic poles of the magnet unit 700. Further, due to the variation in the amounts of the magnet magnetic flux crossing the electrical conductors, the electromotive forces induced in the electrical conductors also vary. Consequently, due to the variation in the electromotive forces, the differences between the electromotive forces induced respectively in the first to the fourth serially-connected units may become large, increasing the circulating current flowing in the closed-loop circuit.

In view of the above, in the present embodiment, the configuration shown in FIG. 79 is employed. With the configuration shown in FIG. 79, it becomes possible to reduce, for each phase of the stator coil 1033, the differences between the electromotive forces induced respectively in the first to the fourth serially-connected units; the differences between the electromotive forces are caused by the differences between the circumferential positions of the electrical conductors relative to the magnetic poles of the magnet unit 700. Consequently, it becomes possible to reduce the circulating current flowing in the stator coil 1033.

According to the third embodiment, it is possible to achieve the following advantageous effects.

In the present embodiment, the teeth 1034 in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole are magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 when the stator coil 1033 is not energized. More specifically, the teeth 1034 and the magnet unit 700 are configured to satisfy the formula (1) (i.e., Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br). Consequently, the teeth 1034 become unable to perform a function of guiding magnetic flux in the magnetic circuit; and the inductance of the stator 1030 can be lowered. Hence, when the stator coil 1033 is energized, magnetic flux leakage from the designed magnetic circuit can be suppressed and torque limitation due to magnetic saturation can be eliminated. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the torque. In addition, using the formula (1), the teeth 1034 and the magnet unit 700 can be easily designed.

Moreover, part of the magnetic flux from the magnet unit 700 may be short-circuited via the magnetic paths formed in the rotor core 1011, causing magnetic flux leakage to occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 are configured, taking into account the magnetic flux short-circuited via the magnetic paths formed in the rotor core 1011, so that the teeth 1034 in each part of the stator 1030 corresponding to one magnetic pole can be magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 when the stator coil 1033 is not energized. More specifically, the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 are configured to satisfy the formula (4) (i.e., Wc×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br). Consequently, even if magnetic flux leakage occurs in the rotor core 1011, the teeth 1034 can still be suitably magnetically saturated and the inductance of the stator 1030 can still be lowered. Hence, when the stator coil 1033 is energized, magnetic flux leakage from the designed magnetic circuit can be suppressed and torque limitation due to magnetic saturation can be eliminated. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the torque. In addition, using the formula (4), the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 can be easily designed.

In the present embodiment, the magnets 701 of the magnet unit 700 are received respectively in the magnet-receiving holes 1012 of the rotor core 1011. In this case, magnetic paths may be formed so as to respectively detour around the circumferential ends of each magnet 701 of the magnet unit 700 and thus the magnetic flux may be short-circuited through the magnetic paths. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 are configured to satisfy the relationship of (Wc1+Wc2)×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wc1 is the width of the first magnetic path and Wc2 is the width of the second magnetic path. In each part of the rotor core 1011 corresponding to one magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700, the first magnetic path is formed by detouring around one circumferential end portion of the magnetic pole whereas the second magnetic path is formed by detouring around the other circumferential end portion of the magnetic pole. Consequently, the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 can be easily designed. Moreover, it becomes possible to suitably taking the magnetic flux leakage in the rotor core 1011 into account, thereby suitably magnetically saturating the teeth 1034 and lowering the inductance of the stator 1030.

In the present embodiment, each phase of the stator coil 1033 is constituted of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 that are connected in parallel to each other. In each electrical conductor group 800, the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 are arranged in radial alignment with each other. Consequently, even if magnetic flux leakage occurs from the teeth 1034 in the circumferential direction, it will still be possible to suppress generation of eddy current in the electrical conductor group 800, thereby suppressing the eddy current loss.

In the present embodiment, in each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor groups 800 of the same phase, the relative positional relationship between the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 is maintained but the arrangement positions of a same one of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 in the pair of the electrical conductor groups 800 are different from each other when viewed along the axial direction of the rotor 1010. With the above configuration, it becomes possible to reduce the differences between the electromotive forces induced respectively in the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 of the same phase, thereby reducing the circulating current flowing in the stator coil 1033.

In the present embodiment, each of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 is constituted of a wire bundle in which the wires 811-814, 821-824, 831-834 or 841-844 are bundled together; and the electrical resistances between the wires are higher than the electrical resistance of each of the wires. Consequently, it becomes possible to reduce the eddy current loss by making the electrical resistivity between the wires and the electrical resistivity of each of the wires different from each other.

In the present embodiment, in each of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840, the wires 811-814, 821-824, 831-834 or 841-844 are connected in series with each other. Consequently, it becomes possible to increase the number of turns of the stator coil 1033, thereby improving the torque.

In the present embodiment, each of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 is formed by bundling and compressing the wires 811-814, 821-824, 831-834 or 841-844 together. Consequently, it becomes unnecessary to employ flat wires; thus the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, it becomes easier to perform a twisting process than in the case of employing flat wires.

(Modifications of Third Embodiment)

In the above-described third embodiment, flux barriers such as void spaces may be provided in the magnet-receiving holes 1012. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, flux barriers 901 may be provided respectively in stator-side circumferential end portions (i.e., q-axis-side end portions) of the magnet-receiving holes 1012. In these portions, it is easy for the magnet magnetic paths to become short; thus it is easy for these portions to become demagnetized. Therefore, providing the flux barriers 901 in these portions, it will become possible to reduce the volume of the magnets without affecting the magnetic flux density. Moreover, in these portions, the distances between the magnetic flux outflow surfaces and the magnetic flux inflow surfaces of the magnets are short; thus it is easy for the magnetic flux of the magnets to be self-short-circuited. Therefore, providing the flux barriers 901 in these portions, it will also become possible to prevent the magnetic flux of the magnets from being self-short-circuited.

In the case of the flux barriers 901 being provided in the magnet-receiving holes 1012, it is difficult for those parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the flux barriers 901 to transmit the magnetic flux to the rotor core 1011. On the other hand, it is easier for the magnetic flux to flow into the magnets from the stator coil 1033 side or flow out of the magnets to the stator coil 1033 side through those parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the rotor core 1011 than through those parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the flux barriers 901. Accordingly, only those parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the rotor core 1011 constitute substantial magnetic flux acting surfaces. Therefore, in the case of the flux barriers 901 being provided in the magnet-receiving holes 1012, the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole is represented by the circumferential width of only that part of the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of the magnet 701 (or the magnetic pole) which abuts the rotor core 1011 (see FIG. 83). That is, the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole does not include the circumferential widths of those parts of the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of the magnet 701 (or the magnetic pole) which abut the flux barriers 901. Consequently, it becomes possible to more accurately design the inter-conductor members.

In the above-described third embodiment, the shapes of the magnets 701 and the easy axes of magnetization (or the magnet magnetic paths) may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the shapes may be modified as shown in FIGS. 84-86. In addition, in the modifications shown in FIGS. 84-86, flux barriers 901 are provided respectively in circumferential end portions of the magnet-receiving holes 1012. Therefore, in these modifications, the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole is represented by the circumferential width of only that part of the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of the magnet 701 (or the magnetic pole) which abuts the rotor core 1011 (see FIGS. 84-86).

In the above-described third embodiment, each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 may be constituted of a plurality of magnets 701. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 may be constituted of a pair of magnets 701 that are arranged symmetrically with respect to the d-axis (or to the central axis of the magnetic pole). In this case, in each part of the rotor core 1011 corresponding to one magnetic pole, there may be formed a pair of magnet-receiving holes 1012 to have the pair of magnets 701 constituting the magnetic pole received respectively therein.

Moreover, in the case of each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 being constituted of a plurality of magnets 701, the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole is represented by the sum of circumferential widths of the radially-outer peripheral surfaces 702 of the plurality of magnets 701. For example, in the modification shown in FIG. 87, the circumferential width Wm of the magnet unit 700 per magnetic pole is represented by (Wm1+Wm2), where Wm1 is the circumferential width of the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of the magnet 701 on the left side and Wm2 is the circumferential width of the radially-outer peripheral surface 702 of the magnet 701 on the right side. In addition, in the modification shown in FIG. 87, flux barriers 901 are provided respectively in circumferential end portions of the magnet-receiving holes 1012; therefore, Wm1 and Wm2 do not include the circumferential widths of those parts of the radially-outer peripheral surfaces 702 of the magnets 701 (or the magnetic pole) which abut the flux barriers 901.

Furthermore, in the case of each magnetic pole of the magnet unit 700 being constituted of a plurality of magnets 701, a magnetic path may be formed in each gap between the magnets 701. For example, in the modification shown in FIG. 87, a magnetic path may be formed in the gap between the pair of magnets 701 (or the pair of magnet-receiving holes 1012); the gap is located in a central part (or d-axis-side part) of the magnetic pole. Consequently, part of the magnetic flux of the magnets 701 may be self-short-circuited via the magnetic path formed in the gap, causing magnetic flux leakage to occur. Therefore, it is desirable to have, taking into account the magnetic flux short-circuited via the magnetic path formed in the gap, the teeth 1034 magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from the magnet unit 700 when the stator coil 1033 is not energized.

Specifically, it is desirable for the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 to be configured to satisfy the following relationship:

(Wc1+Wc2+Wc3)×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br  (6)

where Wc3 is the width of the magnetic path formed between the magnets 701.

In addition, the width of the magnetic path formed between the magnets 701 is represented by the width of a narrowest portion of the magnetic path. Consequently, the teeth 1034, the magnet unit 700 and the rotor core 1011 can be easily designed. Moreover, it becomes possible to suppress magnetic flux leakage from the designed magnetic circuit, thereby improving the torque.

In the above-described modifications of the third embodiment, the shape of the flux barriers 901 may be arbitrarily changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 88, the flux barriers 901 may be configured so as to minimize the width of the magnetic path formed between the magnets 701 while increasing the length of the magnetic path. Consequently, magnetic flux leakage can be more effectively suppressed.

In the above-described third embodiment, the easy axes of magnetization of the magnets 701 (and thus the magnet magnetic paths) may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the magnets 701 may have, instead of the arc-shaped easy axes of magnetization, easy axes of magnetization that are straight in shape. Further, the straight easy axes of magnetization may be oriented so as to be parallel to each other. Alternatively, the straight easy axes of magnetization may be oriented such that the easy axes of magnetization located closer to the d-axis ore parallel to the d-axis than the easy axes of magnetization located closer to the q-axis.

In the above-described third embodiment, the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 may be arranged in alignment with one another in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction as shown in FIG. 89. In this case, as in the above-described third embodiment, in each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor groups 800 of the same phase, the relative positional relationship between the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 is maintained but the arrangement positions of a same one of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 in the pair of the electrical conductor groups 800 are different from each other when viewed along the axial direction of the rotor 1010. Moreover, for each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor groups 800 of the same phase, the arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 constituting one of the pair of the electrical conductor groups 800 may be set to arrangement positions which are obtained by rotating the arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 constituting the other of the pair of the electrical conductor groups 800 by 90×N degrees (N is an integer).

In the above-described third embodiment, each electrical conductor group 800 is constituted of a plurality of electrical conductors (i.e., the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840). Alternatively, each electrical conductor group 800 may be constituted of only one electrical conductor. Moreover, the arrangement positions of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 may not be changed between the electrical conductor groups 800 of the same phase. Furthermore, the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 may have cross-sectional shapes other than the rectangular cross-sectional shape, for example a circular cross-sectional shape.

In the above-described third embodiment, the arrangement and the number of the wires in each of the first to the fourth electrical conductors 810-840 may be arbitrarily changed.

In the above-described third embodiment, the third measure may also be taken. That is, the stator coil 1033 may employ a flat conductor structure in which the radial thickness of the electrical conductors is reduced, thereby recovering decrease in the torque.

The present disclosure is not limited to the embodiments illustrated above. The disclosure encompasses not only the embodiments illustrated above, but also modifications of the embodiments which can be derived by one of ordinary skill in the art from the embodiments. For example, the disclosure is not limited to the combinations of components and/or elements illustrated in the embodiments. Instead, the disclosure may be implemented by various combinations. The disclosure may include additional parts which can be added to the embodiments. The disclosure encompasses components and/or elements omitted from the embodiments. The disclosure also encompasses any replacement or combination of components and/or elements between one and another of the embodiments. The disclosed technical ranges are not limited to the description of the embodiments. Instead, the disclosed technical ranges should be understood as being shown by the recitation of the claims and as encompassing all modifications within equivalent meanings and ranges to the recitation of the claims.

While the disclosure has been described pursuant to the embodiments, it should be appreciated that the disclosure is not limited to the embodiments and the structures. Instead, the disclosure encompasses various modifications and changes within equivalent ranges. In addition, various combinations and modes are also included in the category and the scope of technical idea of the disclosure. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A rotating electric machine comprising: a field system including a magnet section having a plurality of magnetic poles whose polarities alternate in a circumferential direction; and an armature arranged to face the field system and including a multi-phase armature coil, wherein either of the field system and the armature is configured as a rotor, the field system also includes a soft-magnetic core having at least one magnet-receiving hole in which the magnet section is received and held, the armature coil has electrical conductor sections arranged at positions facing the field system and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, in the armature, inter-conductor members are provided between the electrical conductor sections in the circumferential direction, and the inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole are magnetically saturated by magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet section when the electrical conductor sections are not energized.
 2. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 1, wherein the inter-conductor members and the magnet section are configured to satisfy the following relationship: Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wt is a total circumferential width of the inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole, Bs is a saturation flux density of the inter-conductor members, Wm is a circumferential width of the magnet section per magnetic pole and Br is a residual flux density of the magnet section.
 3. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 2, wherein each magnetic pole of the magnet section has a plurality of magnetic flux acting surfaces each of which is a peripheral surface of the magnet section on the armature side in a radial direction and constitutes a magnetic flux inflow surface or a magnetic flux outflow surface, and the circumferential width Wm of the magnet section per magnetic pole is represented by the sum of circumferential widths of the magnetic flux acting surfaces.
 4. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 3, wherein the circumferential width Wm of the magnet section per magnetic pole is represented by the sum of circumferential widths of only parts of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which abut the soft-magnetic core.
 5. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 1, wherein part of the magnetic flux from the magnet section is short-circuited via magnetic paths formed in the soft-magnetic core, and the inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured, taking into account the magnetic flux short-circuited via the magnetic paths formed in the soft-magnetic core, to have the inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole magnetically saturated by the magnetic flux from one magnetic pole of the magnet section when the electrical conductor sections are not energized.
 6. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 1, wherein the inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured to satisfy the following relationship: Wc×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wc is a total width of magnetic paths formed in each part of the soft-magnetic core corresponding to one magnetic pole, Bc is a saturation flux density of the soft-magnetic core, Wt is a total circumferential width of the inter-conductor members in each part of the armature corresponding to one magnetic pole, Bs is a saturation flux density of the inter-conductor members, Wm is a circumferential width of the magnet section per magnetic pole and Br is a residual flux density of the magnet section.
 7. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 6, wherein in each part of the soft-magnetic core corresponding to one magnetic pole, each of the magnetic paths is formed to extend from a magnetic flux outflow surface to a magnetic flux inflow surface of the magnetic pole of the magnet section, the magnetic paths include a first magnetic path formed by detouring around a first circumferential end portion of the magnetic pole of the magnet section and a second magnetic path formed by detouring around a second circumferential end portion of the magnetic pole of the magnet section, and the inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured to satisfy the following relationship: (Wc1+Wc2)×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wc1 is a width of the first magnetic path and Wc2 is a width of the second magnetic path.
 8. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 7, wherein each magnetic pole of the magnet section is constituted of a pair of magnets arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction, the magnetic paths formed in each part of the soft-magnetic core corresponding to one magnetic pole further include a third magnetic path formed between the pair of magnets constituting the magnetic pole, and the inter-conductor members, the magnet section and the soft-magnetic core are configured to satisfy the following relationship: (Wc1+Wc2+Wc3)×Bc+Wt×Bs≤Wm×Br, where Wc3 is a width of the third magnetic path.
 9. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 1, wherein each phase of the armature coil is constituted of a plurality of electrical conductors that are connected in parallel to each other, and in each of the electrical conductor sections, the electrical conductors are arranged in radial alignment with each other.
 10. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 1, wherein each phase of the armature coil is constituted of a plurality of electrical conductors that are connected in parallel to each other, in each of the electrical conductor sections, the electrical conductors are arranged in alignment with one another in at least one of a radial direction and the circumferential direction, and in each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor sections of the same phase, the relative positional relationship between the electrical conductors is maintained but the arrangement positions of a same one of the electrical conductors in the pair of the electrical conductor sections are different from each other when viewed along an axial direction of the rotor.
 11. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 10, wherein for each circumferentially-adjacent pair of the electrical conductor sections of the same phase, the arrangement positions of the electrical conductors constituting one of the pair of the electrical conductor sections are set to arrangement positions which are obtained by rotating the arrangement positions of the electrical conductors constituting the other of the pair of the electrical conductor sections by 90×N degrees (N is an integer) when viewed along the axial direction.
 12. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 10, wherein each of the electrical conductors is constituted of a wire bundle in which a plurality of wires are bundled together, and electrical resistances between the wires are higher than an electrical resistance of each of the wires.
 13. The rotating electric machine as set forth in claim 9, wherein each of the electrical conductors is constituted of a wire bundle in which a plurality of wires are bundled together, and electrical resistances between the wires are higher than an electrical resistance of each of the wires. 